richmahn_en_tn/en_tn_47-1CO.tsv

1	Book	Chapter	Verse	ID	SupportReference	OrigQuote	Occurrence	GLQuote	OccurrenceNote
2	1CO	front	intro	e8ey			0		# Introduction to 1 Corinthians<br><br>## Part 1: General Introduction<br><br>### Outline of the book of 1 Corinthians<br><br>1. Opening (1:1–9)<br>2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)<br>3. Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20)<br>4. On abstinence (7:1–40)<br>5. On food (8:1–11:1)<br>6. On head coverings (11:2–16)<br>7. On the Lord’s Supper (11:17-34)<br>8. On spiritual gifts (12:1–14:40)<br>9. On the resurrection of the dead (15:1–58)<br>10. On the collection and visits (16:1–12)<br>11. Closing: final commands and greetings (16:13–24)<br><br>More detailed outlines for each of these sections appear in the chapter introductions.<br><br>### Who wrote the book of 1 Corinthians?<br><br>The author identifies himself as Paul the apostle. Paul was from the city of Tarsus. He had been known as Saul in his early life. Before becoming a Christian, Paul was a Pharisee, and he persecuted Christians. After he became a Christian, he traveled several times throughout the Roman Empire, telling people about Jesus. Paul first visited the Corinthians during his third time traveling around the Roman Empire (see [Acts 18:1–18](../../act/18/01.md)). After that, Paul wrote this letter while he was in Ephesus ([16:8](../16/08.md)). He lived and proclaimed the gospel there for more than two years (see [Acts 19:1–10](../../act/19/01.md)), and it was sometime during those years that he wrote this letter to the Corinthians.<br><br>### What is the book of 1 Corinthians about?<br><br>While Paul was in Ephesus, he learned things about the Corinthians. People from “Chloe” told Paul about “factions” in the Corinthian group ([1:11](../01/11.md)), and the Corinthian believers wrote a letter to him asking questions ([7:1](../07/01.md)). Paul also mentions that he has “heard” things about what they are doing and saying (see [5:1](../05/01.md); [11:18](../11/18.md); [15:12](../15/12.md)). He may have learned these things from the people “from Chloe,” from their letter, or from other sources, such as “Stephanas and Fortunatus and Achaicus,” who visited Paul before he wrote this letter (see [16:17](../16/17.md)). Paul writes his letter in response to what he has learned about how the Corinthians are thinking and acting. He addresses multiple topics in order. You can see these topics in the outline above. Paul focuses on encouraging the Corinthian believers to remain faithful to Jesus and to behave as those who follow Jesus. <br><br>### How should the title of this book be translated?<br><br>Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “First Corinthians” or “1 Corinthians.” Or they may choose a clearer title, such as “Paul’s First Letter to the Church in Corinth” or “A First Letter to the Christians in Corinth.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])<br><br>## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts<br><br>### What was the city of Corinth like?<br><br>Corinth was a major city located in ancient Greece. Because it was near the Mediterranean Sea and in an important location, many travelers and traders came to buy and sell goods there. Therefore, many different kinds of people lived in the city, and there were many wealthy people. Also, people in Corinth worshiped many different gods, and their worship could include food and sexual activity. In this culture, Christians who did not participate in worshiping at least some of the many gods were often considered to be strange, and people would not want to associate with them. <br><br>### What issues was Paul addressing in this letter?<br><br>Paul addresses many specific topics and issues in his letter to the Corinthian believers. These include church unity, sexual behavior, worship practices, food sacrificed to idols, spiritual gifts, and the resurrection. It is possible that all the problems that Paul wishes to correct in these areas come from one single issue in the Corinthian church. It could be that false teachers are leading the Corinthians astray, or it could be that the Corinthians believers are acting like everyone else in their culture, even when this means not properly following Jesus. Most likely, the Corinthians believed that they had already received all the blessings that Christians will receive when Jesus comes back to the earth. Whatever exactly the primary problem was, what is clear is that the Corinthians were not properly following Jesus in how they were thinking and acting, and Paul writes the letter to guide them back to faithfully following Jesus. <br><br>## Part 3: Important Translation Issues<br><br>### What does Paul mean when he talks about “wisdom” and “foolishness”?<br><br>These words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. If someone creates plans and ideas that work out well, that person is wise. If someone creates plans and ideas that do not work out well, that person is foolish. The wise person makes good choices, and the foolish person makes bad choices. Paul uses these words to contrast what humans think is wise or foolish with what God thinks is wise or foolish. By doing this, Paul wishes to keep the Corinthians from thinking in ways that other humans consider to be “wise.” Rather, he wishes them to think in ways that God considers to be “wise,” which are ways that the other humans might consider to be “foolish.”<br><br>### What does Paul mean when he talks about “knowledge”?<br><br>Paul uses “knowledge” to refer to comprehending or understanding what is true about God and the world. Paul emphasizes that no one really has “knowledge” without the help of the Holy Spirit. He also wants those who have this “knowledge” to continue to act in ways that respect and honor those who do not have the “knowledge.” In other words, he wants to convince the Corinthians that acting in love toward fellow believers is more valuable than any “knowledge.” So, Paul argues that “knowledge” is valuable, but other things are more important. <br><br>### What does Paul mean when he talks about “power” and “weakness”?<br><br>Someone who has “power” has much influence and authority and can accomplish many things. Someone who has “weakness” does not have much influence and authority and is not able to accomplish many things. Paul contrasts what humans think is powerful or weak with what God thinks is powerful or weak. By doing this, Paul wishes to keep the Corinthians from acting in ways that other humans think are “powerful.” Rather, he wishes them to act in ways that God considers “powerful,” which are ways that the other humans might consider to be “weak.” <br><br>### What did Paul mean by the expressions “in Christ,” “in the Lord,” etc.?<br><br>Paul uses the spatial metaphor “in Christ” (often with another name for “Christ,” such as “Lord” or “Jesus”) very frequently in this letter. This metaphor emphasizes that believers are as closely united to Christ as if they were inside him. Paul believes that this is true for all believers, and sometimes he uses “in Christ” simply to indicate that what he is speaking about is true for those who believe in Jesus. Other times, he emphasizes union with Christ as the means or the basis for some statement or exhortation. See the notes on specific verses for help in understanding the contextual meaning of “in Christ” and related phrases. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### How should “brothers” be translated?<br><br>Many times in this letter, Paul directly addresses or refers to people he calls “brothers.” Often, a direct address to the “brothers” indicates that Paul is beginning a new section. The word “brothers” refers in general to fellow believers, both male and female. Paul uses this word because he considers believers to be as closely united together as siblings in a family. Consider what word or phrase would best express both the reference to fellow believers and the idea that these fellow believers are as close as family members. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/brother]])<br><br>### How should extended metaphors be translated?<br><br>Throughout this letter, Paul uses long or extended metaphors. In [3:1–17](../03/01.md). He speaks about children, farming, construction, and temples to discuss how he and others who preach the gospel should relate to the Corinthians. In [5:6–8](../05/06.md), he uses the Jewish festival of Passover to encourage the Corinthians to behave in a certain way. In [9:9–11](../09/09.md), he uses a farming metaphor to speak about receiving money for preaching the gospel, and in [9:24–27](../09/24.md), he uses metaphors related to athletic competitions to encourage the Corinthians to behave in a certain way. In [12:12–27](../12/12.md), Paul uses the human body as an analogy and metaphor for the church. Finally, in [15:36–38](../15/36.md), [42–44](../15/42.md), Paul uses a farming metaphor to speak about the resurrection of the dead. Since these extended metaphors are a significant part of Paul’s argument in these sections, you should retain the metaphors in your translation if possible or express the idea by using an analogy. See the chapter introductions and notes for more information and translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])<br><br>### How should rhetorical questions be translated?<br><br>Paul asks many questions in this letter. He does not ask these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he asks these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. If your readers would understand these kinds of questions, you should retain them in your translation. If your readers would not understand these kinds of questions, you could supply the answers or express the questions as statements. See the notes on each rhetorical question for the implied answer and ways to translate the question as a statement. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>### How should euphemisms be translated?<br><br>Paul uses euphemisms in multiple places in this letter, particularly when he is discussing sexual activity or death. If possible, use euphemisms in your translation. See the notes on each verse that has a euphemism for translation options. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])<br><br>### How should “you” and “we” be translated?<br><br>Throughout the letter, you should assume that “you,” “your,” and “yours” are plural and refer to the Corinthian believers unless a note specifies that the form of “you” is singular. Similarly, throughout the letter, you should assume that “we,” “us,” “our,” and “ours” include Paul, those who work with Paul, and also the Corinthian believers, unless a notes specifies that the form of “we” excludes the Corinthian believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])<br><br>### What are the major issues in the text of the book of 1 Corinthians?<br><br>In the following verses, ancient manuscripts do not all have the same words. The ULT uses the words that are found in most of the earliest manuscripts. When you translate these verses, you should compare the ULT with any translations that your readers may be familiar with to see what your readers may expect. Unless there is a good reason to use the alternate words, you should follow the ULT. See the footnotes and notes at each of these verses for more information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])<br><br>* “the mystery of God” ([2:1](../02/01.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “the testimony of God.”<br>* “God judges” ([5:13](../05/13.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “God will judge.”<br>* “glorify God in your body” ([6:20](../06/20.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “glorify God in your body and in your spirit, which belong to God.”<br>* “as under the law, not being under the law myself in order to gain those under the law” ([9:20](../09/20.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “as under the law in order to gain those under the law.”<br>* “put the Lord to the test” ([10:9](../10/09.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “put Christ to the test.”<br>* “and conscience—” ([10:28](../10/28.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “and conscience, for the earth and everything in it belong to the Lord—”<br>* “I hand over my body so that I might boast” ([13:3](../13/03.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “I hand over my body to be burned.”<br>* “let him be ignorant” ([14:38](../14/38.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “he is considered ignorant.”<br>* “let us also bear” ([15:49](../15/49.md)). Some ancient manuscripts have this: “we will also bear.”<br>* “Amen” ([16:24](../15/49.md)). Some ancient manuscripts do not have “Amen.”
3	1CO	1	intro	ud5y			0		# 1 Corinthians 1 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>1. Opening (1:1–9)<br> * Greetings and Blessing (1:1–3)<br> * Praise and Prayer (1:4–9)<br>2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)<br> * Divisions, Leaders, and Baptism (1:10–17)<br> * Wisdom, Foolishness, and Boasting (1:18–31)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verse 19, which are from the Old Testament.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Disunity<br><br>In this chapter, Paul urges the Corinthians to stop dividing up into smaller groups that identify themselves with one specific leader. He mentions some of the leaders, including himself, in [1:12](../01/12.md). The Corinthians probably chose these leaders themselves, since there is no evidence that any of the people mentioned in [1:12](../01/12.md) were trying to create their own groups. People in the Corinthian church were probably trying to sound wiser or more powerful than other people, so they would choose a group and a leader and say they were better than others. Paul argues against these kinds of divisions first, and then he argues against anyone who tries to sound wiser and more powerful than others.<br><br>### Wisdom and foolishness<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks of both wisdom and foolishness. These words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. If someone creates plans and ideas that work out well, that person is wise. If someone creates plans and ideas that do not work out well, that person is foolish. The wise person makes good choices, and the foolish person makes bad choices. Use words in your language that indicate these ideas. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fool]])<br><br>### Power and weakness<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks of both power and weakness. These words primarily refer to how much influence and authority a person has and to how much they can accomplish. Someone who has “power” has much influence and authority and can accomplish many things. Someone who has “weakness” does not have much influence and authority and is not able to accomplish many things. Use words in your language that indicate these ideas (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/power]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Metaphors about Christ<br><br>In this chapter, Paul says that “Christ is the power of God and the wisdom of God” ([1:24](../01/24.md)) and that Christ “was made for us wisdom from God, righteousness, and also sanctification and redemption” ([1:30](../01/30.md)). With these two verses, Paul is not saying that Christ is no longer a person and is instead these abstract ideas. Rather, Paul is speaking in this way because Christ and his work for believers include all of these abstract ideas. Christ’s work is powerful and wise, and gives those who believe in him wisdom, righteousness, sanctification, and redemption. For ways to translate these two statements, see the notes on these two verses.<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul asks many questions in this chapter. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Positive and negative uses of “wisdom”<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks about wisdom in both positive and negative ways. He uses the same words throughout the chapter, and he distinguishes between positive and negative meanings by connecting the words to different people or ideas. For example, he speaks of wisdom negatively when it is the wisdom of the world, or the wisdom of humans. However, he speaks of wisdom positively when it is wisdom from God or wisdom given by God. If possible, translate the negative and positive meanings of wisdom with the same word, just as Paul uses one word for both negative and positive. If you must use different words, use positive words for God’s wisdom and negative words for human wisdom.<br><br>### Using different perspectives<br><br>Sometimes, Paul speaks of God as if God were “foolish” and “weak” ([1:25](../01/25.md)) and as if he chose “foolish” and “weak” things ([1:27](../01/27.md)). Paul does not actually think that God is foolish and weak and chooses foolish and weak things. Rather, he is speaking from the perspective of normal human thinking. What God does, from a human perspective, is “weak” and “foolish.” He makes this clear in several verses. For example, in [1:26](../01/26.md), Paul says that most of the Corinthians were not wise “according to the flesh.” This is Paul’s way of saying that they were not wise according to human thinking. If possible translate the times Paul speaks from a human perspective with the same words he uses for “weakness” and “foolishness” when he speaks from God’s perspective. If it is necessary to distinguish these uses, use a word or phrase that explains which perspective Paul is using. He does this himself sometimes, and if it is necessary, you can do it in other places as well.<br><br>### Information presented out of order<br><br>The ULT puts parentheses around [1:16](../01/16.md) because Paul is speaking about whom he baptized, an idea that fits logically with [1:14](../01/14.md) and not as well after [1:15](../01/15.md). Paul has remembered someone else that he baptized, and instead of going back and putting that information in [1:14](../01/14.md), he includes it in [1:16](../01/16.md), interrupting the flow of the argument. If possible, keep [1:16](../01/16.md) where it is, and use a form in your language that indicates that Paul is interrupting his argument. If there is no way to do this in your language, you could move [1:16](../01/16.md) so that it follows [1:14](../01/14.md) and [1:15](../01/15.md).
4	1CO	1	1	o7ie	figs-123person	Παῦλος	1		In this culture, letter writers would give their own names first, referring to themselves in the third person. If your readers would misunderstand this, you can use the first person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the author of a letter and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “From Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
5	1CO	1	1	e8j3	translate-names	Παῦλος	1	Paul	Here and throughout the letter, **Paul** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
6	1CO	1	1	qp1n	figs-activepassive	κλητὸς ἀπόστολος Χριστοῦ Ἰησοῦ	1	Sosthenes our brother	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on who is **called** rather than on the person doing the “calling.” Alternate translation: “whom Christ Jesus called {to be} an apostle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
7	1CO	1	1	qvn5	figs-possession	διὰ θελήματος Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the will** that **God** has. If your readers would misunderstand that this phrase refers to what God wills, you could express the idea with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “because God desired this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
8	1CO	1	1	xfbo	figs-explicit	καὶ Σωσθένης	1		This phrase means that Sosthenes is with Paul, and Paul writes the letter for both of them. It does not mean that Sosthenes was the scribe who wrote the letter down. It also does not mean that Sosthenes dictated the letter with Paul, since Paul uses the first-person singular more than the first-person plural in the letter. If there is a way in your language to indicate that Paul writes on behalf of Sosthenes, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “and I write on behalf of Sosthenes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
9	1CO	1	1	n9zv	translate-names	Σωσθένης	1		**Sosthenes** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
10	1CO	1	2	r9kg	figs-123person	τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ…τῇ οὔσῃ ἐν Κορίνθῳ	1	to the church of God at Corinth	In this culture, after giving their own names, letter writers would name those to whom they sent the letter, referring to them in the third person. If that is confusing in your language, you can use the second person here. Or if your language has a particular way of introducing the recipient of a letter, and if it would be helpful to your readers, you can use it here. Alternate translation: “This letter is for you who are members of the church of God at Corinth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
11	1CO	1	2	e75p	figs-activepassive	ἡγιασμένοις	1	those who have been sanctified in Christ Jesus	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **sanctified** rather than the person doing the “sanctifying.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God having sanctified you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
12	1CO	1	2	lp42	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, could explain: (1) the means by which God has sanctified the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “by means of your union with Christ Jesus” (2) the reason why God has sanctified the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “because of your union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
13	1CO	1	2	e8jw	figs-activepassive	κλητοῖς ἁγίοις	1	who are called to be saints	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **called** rather than the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “whom God has called {to be} saints” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
14	1CO	1	2	nz5s	figs-hyperbole	ἐν παντὶ τόπῳ	1		Here Paul describes all believers as if they were **in every place**. He speaks this way to emphasize that believers can be found in many countries, towns, and villages. If your readers would misunderstand **in every place**, you could indicate that believers are found in many places around the world. Alternate translation: “in many places” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
15	1CO	1	2	l21m	figs-idiom	ἐπικαλουμένοις τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν	1	those who call on the name of our Lord Jesus Christ	Here, to “call on the name of” someone is an idiom that refers to worshiping and praying to that person. If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “who pray to and venerate our Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
16	1CO	1	2	l9rq	figs-ellipsis	αὐτῶν καὶ ἡμῶν	1	their Lord and ours	In the phrase **theirs and ours**, Paul has left out words that may be needed in some languages to make a complete thought. If you cannot leave out these words in your language, you could supply words such as “who is” and “Lord” to make a complete thought. Alternate translation: “who is Lord over them and us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
17	1CO	1	3	gc2c	translate-blessing	χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη ἀπὸ Θεοῦ Πατρὸς ἡμῶν καὶ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	General Information:	After stating his name and the name of the person to whom he is writing, Paul adds a blessing for the Corinthians. Use a form that people would recognize as a blessing in your language. Alternate translation: “May you experience kindness and peace within you from God our Father and the Lord Jesus the Messiah” or “I pray that grace and peace from God our Father and the Lord Jesus the Messiah will always be with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-blessing]])
18	1CO	1	4	zd7l	figs-hyperbole	πάντοτε	1		Here, **always** is an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to emphasize how often Paul prays for the Corinthians. If your readers would misunderstand **always**, you could use a word that indicates frequency. Alternate translation: “consistently” or “frequently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
19	1CO	1	4	qoag	figs-distinguish	τῷ Θεῷ μου	1		When Paul speaks of **my God**, he does not mean that this is a different **God** than the one the Corinthians believe in. Rather, he simply wishes to state that this **God** is his God. If **my God** in your translation sounds like it makes a distinction between Paul’s God and the Corinthians’ God, you could use a plural pronoun. Alternate translation: “to our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
20	1CO	1	4	t16d	figs-activepassive	τῇ δοθείσῃ	1	because of the grace of God that was given to you in Christ Jesus	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **grace** that was **given** rather than the person doing the “giving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “that he gave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
21	1CO	1	4	jjtn	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, could explain: (1) the means by which God has given grace to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “by means of your union with Christ Jesus” (2) the reason why God has given grace to the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “because of your union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
22	1CO	1	5	nl9z	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὅτι	1		Here, **For** introduces an explanation of “the grace of God that was given” in [1:4](../01/04.md). Use a word or phrase that introduces a further explanation or elaboration in your language. Alternate translation: “That is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
23	1CO	1	5	qsc9		παντὶ	1		Alternate translation: “every way”
24	1CO	1	5	js7f	figs-metaphor	ἐπλουτίσθητε	1	you have been made rich in him	Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians had received a lot of money **in him**. With this language of being **rich**, Paul means that the Corinthians have received more than they need, and [1:7](../01/07.md) shows that what they have received are spiritual blessings and gifts. If your readers would misunderstand being **made rich**, you could: (1) express this idea with a phrase that refers to how much God has given them. Alternate translation: “you were given many gifts” (2) clarify that Paul speaks of spiritual riches. Alternate translation: “you were made spiritually rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
25	1CO	1	5	kaie	figs-activepassive	ἐπλουτίσθητε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **made rich** rather than the person “making” them **rich**. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God has made you rich” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
26	1CO	1	5	n9wn	writing-pronouns	ἐν αὐτῷ	1		Here, **him** refers to Jesus, since God the Father is the one who makes the Corinthians rich. If your readers would misunderstand **him**, you could use the words “Christ” or “Christ Jesus” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
27	1CO	1	5	j48t	figs-abstractnouns	παντὶ λόγῳ	1	in all speech	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **word**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “speak” or “say.” Alternate translation: “everything you speak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
28	1CO	1	5	qy8c	figs-abstractnouns	πάσῃ γνώσει	1	all knowledge	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **knowledge**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “know.” Alternate translation: “everything you know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
29	1CO	1	6	ef38	grammar-connect-logic-result	καθὼς	1		Here, **just as** could introduce: (1) the reason why the Corinthians were made rich. Alternate translation: “which is due to how” (2) a comparison that illustrates how the Corinthians were made rich. Alternate translation: “in the same way that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
30	1CO	1	6	ub5r	figs-metaphor	τὸ μαρτύριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐβεβαιώθη	1		In this verse, Paul speaks as if what he told the Corinthians about Christ were testimony he gave as a witness in a court of law. This testimony has been **confirmed**, just as if other evidence proved to the judge that his **testimony** was accurate. With this metaphor, he reminds the Corinthians that they have believed the message about Christ and that it is now an important part of their lives. If your readers would misunderstand this metaphor, you could express this idea with a comparable metaphor or express it non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “our message about Christ has been firmly founded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
31	1CO	1	6	h9zk	figs-possession	τὸ μαρτύριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	the testimony about Christ has been confirmed as true among you	Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak about a **testimony** that concerns **Christ**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could make it explicit that **Christ** is the content of the **testimony**. Alternate translation: “the testimony about Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
32	1CO	1	6	tfo3	figs-activepassive	τὸ μαρτύριον τοῦ Χριστοῦ ἐβεβαιώθη	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **confirmed** rather than the person doing the “confirming.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God has confirmed the testimony of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
33	1CO	1	7	t2hd	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1	Therefore	Here, **so that** could introduce: (1) a result from “being made rich” in [1:5](../01/05.md) and from the confirmation of the “testimony” in [1:6](../01/06.md). If you use one of the following alternate translations, you may need to end the previous sentence with a period and begin a new sentence.” Alternate translation: “God has made you rich and confirmed our testimony so that” (2) a result from just the confirmation in [1:6](../01/06.md). Alternate translation: “God confirmed our testimony among you so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
34	1CO	1	7	p5y6	figs-litotes	ὑμᾶς μὴ ὑστερεῖσθαι ἐν μηδενὶ χαρίσματι	1	you lack no spiritual gift	Here Paul uses two negative words, **not** and **lack**, to express a strong positive meaning. He means that the Corinthians have every spiritual gift that God gives. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express this idea in positive form. Alternate translation: “you have every gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
35	1CO	1	7	ymph	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	ἀπεκδεχομένους	1		Here, **eagerly waiting for** introduces something that happens at the same time as not lacking **in any gift**. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could express it explicitly. Alternate translation: “even while you eagerly wait for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
36	1CO	1	7	fe4q	figs-possession	τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ;	1	the revelation of our Lord Jesus Christ	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **revelation** whose content is **our Lord Jesus Christ**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could make this explicit by translating the phrase with a verb with “God” or **our Lord Jesus Christ** as the subject. Alternate translation: “God to reveal our Lord Jesus Christ” or “our Lord Jesus Christ to be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
37	1CO	1	7	o145	figs-explicit	τὴν ἀποκάλυψιν τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		In this context, it is clear that Paul does not simply mean that knowledge about **our Lord Jesus Christ** will be revealed. Rather, he means that **our Lord Jesus Christ** himself will return to earth. If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could use a word such as “return” to make this idea clear. Alternate translation: “the return of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
38	1CO	1	8	cqpk	writing-pronouns	ὃς	1		Here, **who** could refer to: (1) God, who is the implied subject of all the verbs in this section. “If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to end the previous sentence with a period.” If you use one of the following alternate translations, you may need to end the previous sentence with a period. Alternate translation: “It is God who” (2) Jesus, which is the closest name. Alternate translation: “It is Jesus who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
39	1CO	1	8	usci	translate-unknown	καὶ βεβαιώσει ὑμᾶς	1		Here, **confirm** is the same word that Paul used in [1:6](../01/06.md), also translated “confirmed.” Paul uses the word **also** to remind the reader that he has already used **confirmed**. If possible, translate **confirmed** as you did in [1:6](../01/06.md). Just as there, here it refers to something or someone that is proved to be true or accurate. In this case, it means that God will make the Corinthians’ faith true **to the end**. Alternate translation: “will also firmly found your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
40	1CO	1	8	qtpq	figs-idiom	ἕως τέλους	1		The phrase translated **to the end** means that some activity or state will continue until a definable point in the future. Here it means that God will **confirm** the Corinthians until their earthly lives end. If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “until your race is run” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
41	1CO	1	8	pif5	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἀνεγκλήτους	1	you will be blameless	Here, **blameless** gives the result of God confirming them to the end. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could make this connection explicit. Alternate translation: “so that you will be blameless” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
42	1CO	1	9	hp30	figs-activepassive	δι’ οὗ ἐκλήθητε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **called** rather than the person doing the “calling.” Alternate translation: “who called you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
43	1CO	1	9	u2z0	figs-possession	εἰς κοινωνίαν τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **fellowship** that is with **his Son**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could: (1) use a word such as “with” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “into fellowship with his Son” (2) translate **fellowship** with a verb such as “share in” or “commune with.” Alternate translation: “to commune with his Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
44	1CO	1	9	kx3z	guidelines-sonofgodprinciples	τοῦ Υἱοῦ αὐτοῦ	1	his Son	**Son** is an important title for Jesus and identifies his relationship with God the Father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
45	1CO	1	10	huz1	grammar-connect-words-phrases	παρακαλῶ δὲ	1		Here, **Now** indicates the beginning of a new section. Paul transitions from giving thanks to appealing to the Corinthians to avoid divisions. You could: (1) leave this word untranslated and show the shift in topic by starting a new paragraph. Alternate translation: “I urge” (2) use a word or phrase that indicates the beginning of a new section. Alternate translation: “Next, I urge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
46	1CO	1	10	u1u1	figs-infostructure	παρακαλῶ δὲ ὑμᾶς, ἀδελφοί, διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ,	1		In this sentence, the words **I urge you** are located far from what Paul is urging. If it would be clearer in your language, you could move **I urge you** so that it comes right before **that you all speak**. Alternate translation: “Now brothers, through the name of our Lord Jesus Christ, I urge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
47	1CO	1	10	k7gw	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
48	1CO	1	10	sw54	figs-metonymy	διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	through the name of our Lord Jesus Christ	Here Paul uses the **name** of Jesus to refer to the authority of Jesus. With this language, he reminds the Corinthians that he is an apostle with authority from Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of **name**, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “on behalf of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
49	1CO	1	10	u4y2	figs-idiom	τὸ αὐτὸ λέγητε πάντες	1	that you all agree	In this language, to **speak the same thing** is an idiom that means that everyone is in agreement, not only in what they speak but also in what they believe and set as goals. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this phrase, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you all see eye to eye” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
50	1CO	1	10	j75c	translate-unknown	σχίσματα	1	that there be no divisions among you	Here, **divisions** refers to when one group splits into multiple different groups because they have different leaders, beliefs, or opinions. If your readers would misunderstand this word, you could express this idea with a comparable noun or a short phrase that makes this clear. Alternate translation: “opposing parties” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
51	1CO	1	10	tjkg	translate-unknown	κατηρτισμένοι	1		Here, **joined together** refers to putting something into its proper position or state, often returning it to that state. Here, then, it refers to restoring the community to the unity it had and is supposed to have. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this word, you could express this idea with a short phrase. Alternate translation: “restored to your previous unity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
52	1CO	1	10	emt2	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν τῷ αὐτῷ νοῒ καὶ ἐν τῇ αὐτῇ γνώμῃ	1	be joined together with the same mind and by the same purpose	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **mind** and **purpose**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “think” and “decide” or “choose.” Alternate translation: “by thinking the same things and by choosing the same things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
53	1CO	1	11	dtsp	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		Here, **for** introduces the reason why Paul is urging them to become united together. If your readers would misunderstand **for**, you could use a short phrase to express the idea. Alternate translation: “I speak this way because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
54	1CO	1	11	tayn	figs-activepassive	ἐδηλώθη…μοι περὶ ὑμῶν, ἀδελφοί μου, ὑπὸ τῶν Χλόης	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what was **made clear** rather than the people making it **clear**. Alternate translation: “those of Chloe have made it clear to me concerning you, my brothers,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
55	1CO	1	11	ur84	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί μου	1		Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to both men or women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “my brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
56	1CO	1	11	e8jb	figs-explicit	τῶν Χλόης	1	Chloe’s people	Here, **those of Chloe** refers to people who are connected to Chloe and probably live in her house or work for her. Paul does not tell us whether they are family members, slaves, or employees. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this phrase, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that these people are related to or dependent on Chloe. Alternate translation: “people connected to Chloe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
57	1CO	1	11	fd71	translate-names	Χλόης	1		**Chloe** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
58	1CO	1	11	vbe6	translate-unknown	ἔριδες ἐν ὑμῖν εἰσιν	1	there are factions among you	Here, **factions** refers to quarrels or strife among groups within a community. These quarrels or fights are not physical but verbal. If possible, use a word that refers to verbal conflict or express the idea with a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “you have verbal fights with each other” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
59	1CO	1	12	umbx	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, **Now** introduces a further explanation of what Paul started talking about in [1:11](../01/11.md). If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this word, you could leave the word untranslated or use a word that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
60	1CO	1	12	tsn6	figs-idiom	λέγω…τοῦτο,	1		Here Paul uses the phrase **I say this** to explain what he meant in the previous verse when he mentioned “factions” ([1:11](../01/11.md)). If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this phrase, you could use a comparable idiom for explaining what has already been said or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “what I mean is this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
61	1CO	1	12	a4lo	figs-explicitinfo	τοῦτο, ὅτι	1		Having both **this** and **that** in this sentence may be redundant in your language. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a simpler way to introduce what Paul wants to **say**. Alternate translation: “that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
62	1CO	1	12	wf0n	figs-hyperbole	ἕκαστος ὑμῶν λέγει	1		Here Paul uses **each of you** to emphasize that many individuals within the Corinthian congregation are saying these kinds of things. He does not mean that each person says all four of these things. He also does not mean that every single person in the church is making these kinds of claims. Finally, he does not mean that these are the only four claims that they are making. If your readers would misunderstand the form that Paul uses, you could use an expression that singles out many individuals within a group, and you could add a phrase that indicates that these are examples of what they are saying. Alternate translation: “people in your group are saying things like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
63	1CO	1	12	vpym	translate-names	Παύλου…Ἀπολλῶ…Κηφᾶ	1		**Paul**, **Apollos**, and **Cephas** are the names of three men. **Cephas** is another name for Peter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
64	1CO	1	12	bfd0	figs-quotations	ἐγὼ μέν εἰμι Παύλου, ἐγὼ δὲ Ἀπολλῶ, ἐγὼ δὲ Κηφᾶ, ἐγὼ δὲ Χριστοῦ	1		If you cannot use this quotation form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “that you are of Paul, or you are of Apollos, or you are of Cephas, or you are of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
65	1CO	1	12	a57r	figs-possession	ἐγὼ μέν εἰμι Παύλου, ἐγὼ δὲ Ἀπολλῶ, ἐγὼ δὲ Κηφᾶ, ἐγὼ δὲ Χριστοῦ	1	Each one of you says	Here Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that these people claim to be part of a specific leader’s group. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express this idea with a word such as “belong” or “follow.” Alternate translation: “‘I follow Paul,’ or ‘I follow Apollos,’ or ‘I follow Cephas,’ or ‘I follow Christ.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
66	1CO	1	13	iam2	figs-123person	μὴ Παῦλος ἐσταυρώθη ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν, ἢ εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Παύλου ἐβαπτίσθητε	1		In this verse, Paul speaks of himself in the third person. This could sound like he is speaking about a different **Paul** than himself. If your readers would misunderstand this use of **Paul**, you could clarify that Paul is naming himself. Alternate translation: “I, Paul, was not crucified for you, was I? Or were you baptized in my name, Paul?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
67	1CO	1	13	wf6r	figs-rquestion	μεμέρισται ὁ Χριστός?	1	Is Christ divided?	Paul asks if **Christ** has **been divided**, but he is not really asking for information. Rather, the question assumes that the answer is “no,” and Paul uses a question to invite the Corinthians to think about how absurd their behavior is. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this question, you could express the idea with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “Christ has certainly not been divided!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
68	1CO	1	13	w175	figs-activepassive	μεμέρισται ὁ Χριστός?	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **divided** rather than whoever does the “dividing.” If you must state who does the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Have they divided Christ?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
69	1CO	1	13	aw2r	figs-metaphor	μεμέρισται ὁ Χριστός	1		Here Paul speaks as if **Christ** could be **divided** into pieces and given to different groups. He speaks this way because he identifies the church with the body of Christ. If the church is divided into groups, then the body of Christ has been divided up as well. However, it is absurd to think that Christ’s body has been cut up into pieces, so it is also absurd to divide the church into pieces. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this phrase, you could make this connection more explicit. Alternate translation: “Has Christ’s own body been divided, just as your church has been divided?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
70	1CO	1	13	g5qh	figs-rquestion	μὴ Παῦλος ἐσταυρώθη ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν	1	Was Paul crucified for you?	Paul asks if **Paul was not crucified**, but he is not really asking for information. Rather, the question assumes that the answer is “no,” and Paul uses a question to invite the Corinthians to think about how absurd their thinking is. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “Paul was certainly not crucified for you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
71	1CO	1	13	lqsy	figs-activepassive	μὴ Παῦλος ἐσταυρώθη ὑπὲρ ὑμῶν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the one who is **crucified** rather than whoever does the “crucifying.” If you must state who does the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “They did not crucify Paul for you, did they?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
72	1CO	1	13	tb2i	figs-rquestion	ἢ εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Παύλου ἐβαπτίσθητε?	1	Were you baptized in the name of Paul?	Paul asks if they **were baptized in the name of Paul**, but he is not really asking for information. Rather, the question assumes that the answer is “no,” and Paul uses a question to invite the Corinthians to think about how absurd their thinking is. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “You were certainly not baptized in the name of Paul!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
73	1CO	1	13	tii7	figs-activepassive	ἢ εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Παύλου ἐβαπτίσθητε?	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **baptized** rather than whoever does the “baptizing.” If you must state who does the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Or did they baptize you in the name of Paul?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
74	1CO	1	13	zi1y	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ὄνομα Παύλου	1	in the name of Paul	Here Paul uses the word **name** to refer to authority. What he means is that, when they were baptized, no one used the **name of Paul**, and therefore they do not belong to his group. Instead, he implicitly asserts that they belong to God, whose name would have been used when they were baptized. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this word, you could express this idea by using the word “authority” or by a phrase that includes the language of “belonging.” Alternate translation: “under the authority of Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
75	1CO	1	14	hhh8	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐδένα ὑμῶν ἐβάπτισα, εἰ μὴ	1	none of you, except	If it would appear in your language that Paul is making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword the sentence to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “I baptized only two of you:” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
76	1CO	1	14	vqq6	translate-names	Κρίσπον…Γάϊον	1	Crispus	**Crispus** and **Gaius** are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
77	1CO	1	15	hv3m	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	This was so that no one would say that you were baptized into my name	Here, **so that** introduces a purpose or result. In this case, it introduces what results from Paul not baptizing many of the Corinthians. Because he did not baptize almost any of them, they cannot say that they were baptized into his name. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could use a word that indicates result, and you could specify that it is the result of Paul not baptizing many of them. Alternate translation, as a new sentence: “The result is that” or “Therefore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
78	1CO	1	15	dwdv	figs-activepassive	εἰς τὸ ἐμὸν ὄνομα ἐβαπτίσθητε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **baptized** rather than whoever does the “baptizing.” If you must state who does the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “someone baptized you into my name” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
79	1CO	1	15	u8f6	figs-metonymy	εἰς τὸ ἐμὸν ὄνομα	1		Here, just as in [1:13](../01/13.md), Paul uses the word **name** to refer to authority. What he means is that, when they were baptized, no one used Paul’s **name**, and therefore they do not belong to his group. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this word, you could express this idea by using the word “authority” or by a phrase that includes the language of “belonging.” Alternate translation: “under my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
80	1CO	1	16	mq74	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, **Now** interrupts the argument and reintroduces the theme of [1:14](../01/14.md), which is about whom Paul baptized. If your readers would misunderstand this transition, you could express this idea by using punctuation that indicates a brief aside or parenthesis, or you could use a phrase that introduces when someone remembers something. Alternate translation: “Speaking of baptizing, I remember that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
81	1CO	1	16	ed59	translate-names	Στεφανᾶ	1	the household of Stephanas	**Stephanas** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
82	1CO	1	16	nlzn	translate-unknown	οὐκ οἶδα εἴ τινα ἄλλον ἐβάπτισα	1		This statement expresses more or less confidence about how many people Paul baptized. It could mean that Paul is: (1) relatively confident that he has thought of everyone he baptized. Alternate translation: “I think that this is everyone that I baptized” (2) less confident that he has thought of everyone he baptized. Alternate translation: “I do not remember if I baptized any others” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
83	1CO	1	16	qbjf	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ	1		Paul here uses the condition introduced by **if** because he wishes to acknowledge that he thinks he has mentioned everyone that he baptized, but he is not sure. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this word, you could use a word that expresses uncertainty. Alternate translation: “whether” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
84	1CO	1	17	jkfj	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** introduces an explanation for why Paul has baptized so few people. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could use a word that introduces an explanation, and you could clarify that it explains how little he baptizes. Alternate translation: “I only baptized a few people, because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
85	1CO	1	17	ga5k	figs-infostructure	οὐ…ἀπέστειλέν με Χριστὸς βαπτίζειν, ἀλλὰ εὐαγγελίζεσθαι	1		If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse them and introduce **not with wise speech** by repeating **proclaim**. Alternate translation: “Christ sent me to proclaim the gospel, not to baptize. I proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
86	1CO	1	17	tg7i	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ εὐαγγελίζεσθαι	1	Christ did not send me to baptize	In this clause, Paul has omitted some words that might be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If you do need these words in your language, you could repeat the “sending” language. Alternate translation: “but he sent me to proclaim the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
87	1CO	1	17	p3cf	figs-ellipsis	οὐκ ἐν σοφίᾳ λόγου	1		In this clause, Paul has omitted some words that might be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If you do need these words in your language, you could repeat the “proclaiming” language. Alternate translation: “I do not proclaim it with wise speech” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
88	1CO	1	17	u60s	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		Here, **so that** introduces the purpose for which Paul does not use “wise speech.” Here, you could use a word or phrase that normally indicates purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
89	1CO	1	17	zn1n	figs-metaphor	μὴ κενωθῇ ὁ σταυρὸς τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	clever speech … the cross of Christ should not be emptied of its power	Here Paul speaks as if the **cross of Christ** were a container that was full of power and which he does not wish to empty of that power. By this, he means that he does not want to take away the power that the cross and the message about it have. If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively, including the idea of power. Alternate translation: “the cross of Christ would not lose its power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
90	1CO	1	17	qdyj	figs-activepassive	μὴ κενωθῇ ὁ σταυρὸς τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **cross** that could be **emptied** rather than the person doing the “emptying.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that he himself would do it. Alternate translation: “I would not empty the cross of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
91	1CO	1	18	j7cw	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1	Connecting Statement:	Here, **For** introduces an explanation of the last part of [1:17](../01/17.md). In this verse, then, Paul explains further why he does not use wise speech. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could use words that introduce an explanation, and you could briefly restate what Paul is explaining. Alternate translation: “I speak in this way because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
92	1CO	1	18	fq4x	figs-possession	ὁ λόγος…ὁ τοῦ σταυροῦ	1	the message about the cross	Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak about a **word** or a teaching that is about **the cross**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could clarify that the **cross** is the content of the **word**. Alternate translation: “the word about the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
93	1CO	1	18	utr3	figs-metonymy	τοῦ σταυροῦ	1		Here, the word **cross** stands for the event in which Jesus died on the cross. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this word, you could include Jesus’ death in your translation. Alternate translation: “of Jesus’s death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
94	1CO	1	18	p4wb	figs-abstractnouns	μωρία ἐστίν	1	is foolishness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **foolishness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “foolish.” Alternate translation: “seems foolish” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
95	1CO	1	18	lq5z	figs-activepassive	τοῖς…ἀπολλυμένοις	1	to those who are dying	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who **are perishing** rather than on the person who makes them “perish.” If you must state who does the action, Paul could imply that: (1) they cause or experience the action. Alternate translation: “to those who will experience destruction” (2) God does the action. Alternate translation: “to those whom God will destroy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
96	1CO	1	18	ao4m	figs-activepassive	τοῖς δὲ σῳζομένοις ἡμῖν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **being saved** rather than the person doing the “saving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “but to us whom God is saving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
97	1CO	1	18	m66w	figs-distinguish	τοῖς δὲ σῳζομένοις ἡμῖν	1		The description **who are being saved** distinguishes **us** from everyone else. It is not just adding information. Use a form in your language that shows that this is a distinguishing phrase. Alternate translation: “but to us, that is, the ones who are being saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
98	1CO	1	18	ji74	figs-possession	δύναμις Θεοῦ ἐστιν	1	it is the power of God	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **power** that comes from **God**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could clarify that **God** is the source of the **power**. Alternate translation: “power from God” or “God working in power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
99	1CO	1	19	fdhk	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1		Here, **For** introduces Paul’s evidence that what he said in [1:18](../01/18.md) is true. You could use a word that introduces evidence for a claim or leave the word untranslated. Alternate translation: “As” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
100	1CO	1	19	wx5x	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you could express it so that: (1) the scripture or scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “Isaiah has written” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
101	1CO	1	19	tzmj	writing-quotations	γέγραπται γάρ	1		In Paul’s culture, **For it is written** was a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text. In this case, the quotation comes from [Isaiah 29:14](../../isa/29/14.md). If your readers would misunderstand how Paul introduces the quotation, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it can be read in Isaiah” or “For it says in the book of Isaiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
102	1CO	1	19	tc6n	figs-quotations	ἀπολῶ τὴν σοφίαν τῶν σοφῶν, καὶ τὴν σύνεσιν τῶν συνετῶν ἀθετήσω	1	I will frustrate the understanding of the intelligent	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate this direct quote as an indirect quote, specifying that God is the subject and including an introductory word such as “that.” Alternate translation: “that God will destroy the wisdom of the wise, and he will frustrate the understanding of the intelligent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
103	1CO	1	19	kzb0	figs-possession	τὴν σοφίαν τῶν σοφῶν…τὴν σύνεσιν τῶν συνετῶν	1		In both of these clauses, Paul uses the possessive form to describe **wisdom** or **understanding** that belongs to **the wise** or **the intelligent**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could indicate that **wisdom** and **understanding** belong to **the wise** or **the intelligent**. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that the wise have … the understanding that the intelligent have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
104	1CO	1	19	gft6	figs-nominaladj	τῶν σοφῶν…τῶν συνετῶν	1		Paul is using the adjectives **wise** and **intelligent** as nouns in order to describe groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “of the people who are wise … of the people who are intelligent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
105	1CO	1	19	pa5n	translate-unknown	τῶν συνετῶν	1		Here, **intelligent** describes someone who is good at figuring out problems, understanding new ideas, and making smart decisions. Use a word in your language that gets this general idea across. Alternate translation: “of the smart” or “of the clever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
106	1CO	1	20	m6tf	figs-rquestion	ποῦ σοφός? ποῦ γραμματεύς? ποῦ συνζητητὴς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου?	1	Where is the wise person? Where is the scholar? Where is the debater of this world?	With these questions, Paul is not actually asking about the location of certain people. Rather, he is suggesting to the Corinthians that these kinds of people cannot be found. If your readers would misunderstand these questions, you could express the idea with statements that: (1) assert that these people do not actually have real wisdom, knowledge, or skill. Alternate translation: “The wise person does not really have wisdom. The scholar does not really know much. The debater of this age is not really good at arguing” (2) assert that these people do not exist. Alternate translation: “There is no wise person. There is no scholar. There is no debater of this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
107	1CO	1	20	h0qa	figs-genericnoun	σοφός…γραμματεύς…συνζητητὴς	1		Paul uses these singular nouns to identify types of people, but he does not mean just one **wise person**, **scholar**, or **debater**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a form that identifies a type of person, or you could translate these nouns in plural form. Alternate translation: “the kind of person who has wisdom … the kind of person who is a scholar … the kind of person who is a debater” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
108	1CO	1	20	mzxx	figs-possession	συνζητητὴς τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **debater** who is part of **this age**. In fact, Paul may mean that the **wise person** and the **scholar** also belong to **this age**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express this idea with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the debater, who belongs in this age” or “the debater? All these kinds of people belong to this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
109	1CO	1	20	u5j5	translate-unknown	συνζητητὴς	1	the debater	Here, **debater** refers to a person who spends much of their time arguing about beliefs, values, or actions. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this word, you could use a short phrase or a term that expresses this idea better. Alternate translation: “the disputant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
110	1CO	1	20	a7zl	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ ἐμώρανεν ὁ Θεὸς τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ κόσμου?	1	Has not God turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a statement. Alternate translation: “ God has turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
111	1CO	1	20	y5wx	figs-possession	τὴν σοφίαν τοῦ κόσμου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **wisdom** that seems wise according to the standard of this **world**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that this world values” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
112	1CO	1	21	cihg	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** introduces an explanation of how God has turned the wisdom of the world into foolishness ([1:20](../01/20.md)). You could use a word that introduces an explanation in your language or a short phrase that identifies that this verse explains the previous verse. Alternate translation: “That is,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
113	1CO	1	21	eauj	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἐπειδὴ…οὐκ ἔγνω ὁ κόσμος διὰ τῆς σοφίας τὸν Θεόν, εὐδόκησεν ὁ Θεὸς	1		Here, **since** introduces the reason for the second half of the verse, which , begins with **God was pleased**. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could make this more explicit or break the two pieces into two sentences and use a transition word that indicates result. Alternate translation: “because … the world did not know God through wisdom, therefore God was pleased” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
114	1CO	1	21	tnez	figs-possession	ἐν τῇ σοφίᾳ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **wisdom** that **God** uses when he makes decisions or acts. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea by adding “plans” or “thinking” and translating **wisdom** with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “in God’s wise plan” or ”in God’s wise thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
115	1CO	1	21	odyk	figs-synecdoche	ὁ κόσμος	1		Here Paul uses **world** to refer to the humans that are part of the **world**. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this word, you could translate **world** with a word or phrase that refers to people who do not believe in Christ, or you could use a phrase like “people of the world.” Alternate translation: “the people of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
116	1CO	1	21	d7xw	figs-possession	τῆς μωρίας τοῦ κηρύγματος	1	those who believe	Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **preaching** that is characterized by **foolishness**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea by translating **foolishness** as an adjective describing **the preaching** or the content of **the preaching**. Alternate translation: “the foolish preaching” or “the foolish message that we preach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
117	1CO	1	21	lkk1	figs-irony	τῆς μωρίας	1		Paul describes the **preaching** as **foolishness**. He does not actually think his message is foolish. Instead, he speaks from the perspective of **the world** and its **wisdom**, because the message is foolish to **the world**. If your readers would misunderstand this way of speaking, you could use an expression that indicates that Paul is using irony or speaking from another person’s perspective. Alternate translation: “the so-called foolishness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
118	1CO	1	22	j8nh	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἐπειδὴ καὶ	1		Here, **For** sets up the contrast between this verse and what Paul says in the next verse. If your language has a way to begin a contrast, you could use it here. Otherwise, you could leave the word untranslated. Alternate translation: “It is indeed true that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
119	1CO	1	22	e1sy	figs-hyperbole	Ἰουδαῖοι…Ἕλληνες	1		By using the words translated **Jews** and **Greeks**, Paul is not saying that every single Jewish and Greek person does these things. Instead, he is generalizing, identifying common patterns among people who are Jewish and Greek. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could clarify that not all **Jews** and **Greeks** are meant. Alternate translation: “most Jews … most Greeks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
120	1CO	1	22	t32r	translate-unknown	Ἕλληνες	1		Here, **Greeks** does not refer only to people who are ethnically Greek. However, it also does not refer to everyone who is not a Jew. Rather, it refers to people who speak the Greek language and who value the philosophy and education that are part of Greek culture. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this word, you could use a word or phrase that identifies these people by their interests and values more than by their ethnicity. Alternate translation: “people who value Greek philosophy” or “people who had a Greek education” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
121	1CO	1	23	q8sj	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here Paul continues the contrast he set up in [1:22](../01/22.md). Jews seek signs, and Greeks seek wisdom, but Paul and those like him proclaim that the Messiah was crucified. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could use a word or phrase that indicates a strong contrast between behavior or beliefs. Alternate translation: “In contrast with them,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
122	1CO	1	23	v9fa	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	1	General Information:	Here, **we** refers to Paul and others who proclaim the gospel with him. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
123	1CO	1	23	ntu3	figs-activepassive	Χριστὸν ἐσταυρωμένον	1	Christ crucified	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **Christ** who was **crucified** rather than the person doing the “crucifying.” If you must state who does the action, you could express the idea with: (1) **Christ** as the subject. Alternate translation: “that Christ laid down his life on the cross” (2) an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “that they crucified Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
124	1CO	1	23	krw3	figs-metaphor	σκάνδαλον	1	a stumbling block	Paul uses **stumbling block** to indicate that the message about “Christ crucified” causes offense or repulses many Jews. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this word, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “a repulsive concept” or “an unacceptable idea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
125	1CO	1	23	n6u2	figs-hyperbole	Ἰουδαίοις…ἔθνεσιν	1		By using the words translated **Jews** and **Gentiles**, Paul is not saying that every single Jewish and Gentile person responds to the gospel in these ways. Instead, he is generalizing, identifying common patterns among people who are Jewish and Gentile. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could clarify that not all **Jews** and **Gentiles** are meant. Alternate translation: “to most Jews … to most Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
126	1CO	1	24	xgw1	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here Paul uses **But** to contrast **those who are called** and the “Jews” and “Gentiles” in [1:23](../01/23.md). If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could use a word or phrase that contrasts people and their thinking. Alternate translation: “In contrast with them,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
127	1CO	1	24	i7l4	figs-infostructure	αὐτοῖς…τοῖς κλητοῖς, Ἰουδαίοις τε καὶ Ἕλλησιν, Χριστὸν Θεοῦ δύναμιν, καὶ Θεοῦ σοφίαν	1		Paul here puts the people he is talking about first before he makes a statement about them. If this is unnatural in your language, you could: (1) phrase the sentence so that **those who are called** is the subject of the whole sentence. Alternate translation: “those who are called, both Jews and Greeks, know that Christ {is} the power of God and the wisdom of God” (2) move **to those who are called** to the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Christ {is} the power of God and the wisdom of God to those who are called, both Jews and Greeks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
128	1CO	1	24	h7iw	figs-123person	αὐτοῖς…τοῖς κλητοῖς	1	to those whom God has called	Paul uses the third person to speak about those whom God has called, because he is speaking of the group as a category in comparison with Jews who find the gospel a stumbling block and Gentiles who find the gospel to be foolish. He does not use the third person because he excludes himself or the Corinthians from this category. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea with the first person. Alternate translation: “to those of us who are called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
129	1CO	1	24	appp	figs-activepassive	τοῖς κλητοῖς	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **called** rather than the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “whom God has called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
130	1CO	1	24	pt5x	translate-unknown	Ἕλλησιν	1		Here, **Greeks** does not refer only to people who are ethnically Greek. However, it also does not refer to everyone who is not a Jew. Rather, it refers to people who speak the Greek language and who value the philosophy and education that are part of Greek culture. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this word, you could use a word or phrase that identifies these people by their interests and values more than by their ethnicity. Alternate translation: “people who value Greek philosophy” or “people who had a Greek education” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
131	1CO	1	24	hu1s	figs-metonymy	Χριστὸν	1	Christ as the power and the wisdom of God	Here, the word **Christ** could refer to: (1) the message about the work of Christ. Alternate translation: “the message about Christ” (2) the work of Christ, especially his death. Alternate translation: “Christ’s work” or “Christ’s death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
132	1CO	1	24	w9vm	figs-possession	Θεοῦ δύναμιν	1	the power … of God	Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **power** that comes from **God**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could clarify that **God** is the source of the **power**. Alternate translation: “power from God” or “God acting powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
133	1CO	1	24	p1hu	figs-possession	Θεοῦ σοφίαν	1	the wisdom of God	Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **wisdom** that comes from **God**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could clarify that **God** is the source of the **wisdom**. Alternate translation: “wisdom from God” or “God giving wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
134	1CO	1	25	fst8	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὅτι	1		Here, **For** introduces the reason why the seemingly foolish message about Christ is power and wisdom ([1:24](../01/24.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could use a word that introduces a reason or a short phrase that connects this verse to the previous verse or verses. Alternate translation: “God works through foolishness because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
135	1CO	1	25	h9hh	figs-irony	τὸ μωρὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ…τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1	the foolishness of God is wiser than people, and the weakness of God is stronger than people	Paul describes God as having **foolishness** and **weakness**. He does not actually think that God is weak and foolish, but he is speaking of them from the perspective of the world and its wisdom. From the perspective of the world, Paul’s God is indeed foolish and weak. What Paul means to say is that what the world sees as **foolishness** and **weakness** is still **wiser** and **stronger** than anything that humans have to offer. If your readers would misunderstand this way of speaking, you could use an expression that indicates that Paul is using irony or speaking from another person’s perspective. Alternate translation: “the apparent foolishness of God … the apparent weakness of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
136	1CO	1	25	esc9	figs-gendernotations	τῶν ἀνθρώπων	-1		The words translated **men** in both places in this verse do not refer just to male people. Rather, Paul means any human of any sex. If your readers would misunderstand **men**, you could refer to both genders or use a gender-neutral word. Alternate translation: “women and men … women and men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
137	1CO	1	25	jydy	figs-possession	τὸ μωρὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ…ἐστίν	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **foolishness** that comes from **God**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea with a phrase that indicates that **God** does **foolishness**. Alternate translation: “the foolish things that God does are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
138	1CO	1	25	uciw	figs-ellipsis	σοφώτερον τῶν ἀνθρώπων ἐστίν	1		Paul does not include all the words that are needed in many languages to make a complete comparison. If you do need these words in your language, you could add whatever is needed to make the comparison complete, such “the wisdom.” Alternate translation: “is wiser than the wisdom of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
139	1CO	1	25	gnpe	figs-possession	τὸ ἀσθενὲς τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **weakness** that comes from **God**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could translate this idea with a phrase that indicates that **God** does **weakness**. Alternate translation: “the weak things that God does {are}” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
140	1CO	1	25	i7pl	figs-ellipsis	ἰσχυρότερον τῶν ἀνθρώπων	1		Paul does not include all the words that are needed in many languages to make a complete comparison. If you do need these words in your language, you could add whatever is needed to make the comparison complete, such “the strength.” Alternate translation: “stronger than the strength of men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
141	1CO	1	26	je03	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** introduces proof for or examples of what Paul has claimed so far about God choosing to work through foolishness and weakness. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could use a word or phrase that introduces examples or support. Alternate translation: “For instance,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
142	1CO	1	26	c8sf	translate-unknown	τὴν κλῆσιν ὑμῶν	1		Here, **calling** refers primarily to who the Corinthians were at the time of their **calling**. It does not primarily refer to God’s act in **calling** them. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this word, you can emphasize this aspect in your translation. Alternate translation: “who you were at your calling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
143	1CO	1	26	xq6b	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1		Here, **brothers** does not just refer to men but to people of any sex. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
144	1CO	1	26	w6l1	figs-litotes	οὐ πολλοὶ	-1	Not many of you	Here Paul uses a form that can more easily be stated in inverse form in many languages. If: (1) your language would most naturally put **not** with the verb instead of **many**, you could do so here. Alternate translation: “many {were} not … many {were} not … and many {were} not” (2) your language would most naturally use a word that indicates a small number of people here, you could use it without **not**. Alternate translation: “few … few … and few” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
145	1CO	1	26	unig	writing-pronouns	οὐ πολλοὶ	-1		While Paul does not explicitly state that **not many** refers to the Corinthians, he is referring to the Corinthians when he says **not many**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could insert “you.” Alternate translation: “not many of you … not many of you … and not many of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
146	1CO	1	26	camj	figs-infostructure	οὐ πολλοὶ σοφοὶ κατὰ σάρκα, οὐ πολλοὶ δυνατοί, οὐ πολλοὶ εὐγενεῖς	1		Paul here uses the phrase **according to the flesh** to clarify what he means by **wise**, and also **powerful**, and also **of noble birth**, not just **wise**. If your readers would misunderstand what **according to the flesh** modifies, you could move the phrase so that it is clear that it modifies all three of these statements. Alternate translation: “according to the flesh, not many {were} wise, not many {were} powerful, and not many {were} of noble birth (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
147	1CO	1	26	pws2	figs-idiom	κατὰ σάρκα	1	wise according to the flesh	Here Paul uses the phrase **according to the flesh** to refer to human ways of thinking. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this phrase, you could express the idiom **according to the flesh** with a phrase that refers to human values or perspectives. Alternate translation: “according to human definitions” or “according to what humans value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
148	1CO	1	27	qjvd	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		Here Paul introduces a contrast. He is contrasting **God chose the foolish things** with what a person might expect about how God would treat foolish and weak people like the Corinthians. He is not contrasting how **God chose the foolish things** with the statements in the previous verse about the foolishness and weakness of the Corinthians. If your readers would misunderstand this contrast, you could clarify that Paul writes **But** to contrast this statement with what a person might expect about God. Alternate translation: “Despite what might be expected,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
149	1CO	1	27	qv5l	figs-parallelism	τὰ μωρὰ τοῦ κόσμου ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός, ἵνα καταισχύνῃ τοὺς σοφούς; καὶ τὰ ἀσθενῆ τοῦ κόσμου ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός, ἵνα καταισχύνῃ τὰ ἰσχυρά	1	God chose … wise. God chose … strong	Here Paul makes two very similar statements in which **foolish** goes with **weak** and **wise** goes with **strong**. These two statements are almost synonymous, and Paul repeats himself to emphasize the point. If your readers would misunderstand why Paul uses two parallel sentences, and if the repetition would not emphasize the point, you could combine the two sentences into one. Alternate translation: “God chose the unimportant things of the world in order that he might shame the important things” or “God chose the foolish and weak things of the world in order that he might shame the wise and strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
150	1CO	1	27	r4ly	figs-possession	τὰ μωρὰ τοῦ κόσμου…τὰ ἀσθενῆ τοῦ κόσμου	1		Paul uses the possessive form twice to clarify that the **foolish things** and **weak things** are only **foolish** and **weak** from the perspective of the **world**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea with a phrase such as “according to the world.” Alternate translation: “things that are foolish according to the world … things that are weak according to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
151	1CO	1	27	gdob	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ κόσμου	-1		When Paul uses **the world** in this context, he is not referring primarily to everything that God has made. Rather, he uses **the world** to refer to human beings. If your readers would misunderstand **the world**, you could use an expression that refers to human beings in general. Alternate translation: “of people … of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
152	1CO	1	27	iwho	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	-1		Here, **in order that** could introduce: (1) the purpose for which **God chose the foolish things of the world** and **the weak things of the world**. Alternate translation: “so that … so that” (2) what happened when **God chose the foolish things of the world** and **the weak things of the world**. Alternate translation: “with the result that … with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
153	1CO	1	27	vtzx	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς σοφούς…τὰ ἰσχυρά	1		Paul uses the adjective **wise** to describe a group of people, and he uses the adjective **strong** to describe a group of people and things. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these two adjectives with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “people who are wise … people and things which are strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
154	1CO	1	28	tqxg	figs-parallelism	τοῦ κόσμου…ἐξελέξατο ὁ Θεός,…ἵνα	1		In this verse, Paul repeats many of the words from the parallel parts of the previous verse. He does this because, in his culture, repeating the same idea with different examples was more convincing than using just one example. If possible, translate these words the same way that you translated them in [1:27](../01/27.md). You could remove or change some of the words if it makes the sentence sound more convincing. Alternate translation: “he chose … of the world … in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
155	1CO	1	28	k3kd	translate-unknown	τὰ ἀγενῆ	1	what is low and despised	Here, **base things** is the opposite of the word translated “of noble birth” in [1:26](../01/26.md). Paul uses it to refer to things and people that were not considered important or powerful in his culture. If your readers would misunderstand **base things**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to people and things that have low status or low importance. Alternate translation: “the marginalized things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
156	1CO	1	28	d5pa	translate-unknown	τὰ ἐξουθενημένα	1		While **base things** refers to a person’s status or a thing’s status, the word translated **despised things** refers to how people treat other people or things that have low status. Usually, people badly treat others whom they consider to be of lower status, ignoring them or mocking them. That is what Paul means when he says **despised**. If your readers would misunderstand **despised things**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to how people mistreat others of lower status. Alternate translation: “the scorned things” or “the things people treat with contempt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
157	1CO	1	28	wir6	figs-possession	τὰ ἀγενῆ τοῦ κόσμου καὶ τὰ ἐξουθενημένα	1		Here Paul uses **of the world** to describe both **the base things** and **the despised things**. As in [1:27](../01/27.md), he uses the possessive form to clarify that **base things and the despised things** are only **base** and **despised** from the perspective of the world. If your readers would misunderstand **of the world**, you could express the idea with a phrase such as “according to the world.” Alternate translation: “the base things and the despised things according to the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
158	1CO	1	28	unyl	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ κόσμου	1		When Paul uses **the world** in this context, he is not referring primarily to everything that God has made. Rather, he uses **the world** to refer to human beings. If your readers would misunderstand **the world**, you could use an expression that refers to human beings in general. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
159	1CO	1	28	gj19	figs-hyperbole	τὰ μὴ ὄντα	1	nothing, to bring to nothing things that are held as valuable	Here Paul further describes the **base things** and **the despised things** as if they were **things that are not**. He does not mean that the **base** and **despised things** do not exist. Instead, he is identifying how people often ignore the **base** and **despised things**, just as if they did not exist at all. If your readers would misunderstand **the things that are not**, you could use a comparable phrase or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the things that people ignore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
160	1CO	1	28	f11p	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1	things that are held as valuable	Here, **in order that** could introduce: (1) the purpose for which **God chose the base things and the despised things of the world, the things that are not**. Alternate translation: “so that” (2) what happened when **God chose the base things and the despised things of the world, the things that are not**. Alternate translation: “with the result that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
161	1CO	1	28	f9s5	translate-unknown	καταργήσῃ	1		Here, **he might bring to nothing** refers to making something ineffective, useless, or irrelevant. What Paul means is that God has made **the things that are** unimportant and without function because he instead worked through **the things that are not**. If your readers would misunderstand **bring to nothing**, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that a person has acted so that something else is no longer important, useful, or effective. Alternate translation: “he might tear down” or “render ineffective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
162	1CO	1	28	etjg	figs-idiom	τὰ ὄντα	1		In this context, **the things that are** does not refer primarily to things that exist. Rather, it refers primarily to things that are important in society and culture. If your readers would misunderstand **the things that are**, you could use a comparable phrase that refers to important or significant things and people in your culture. Alternate translation: “the things that people care about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
163	1CO	1	29	unr6	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ὅπως	1		Here, **so that** introduces a final goal. In [1:28–29](../01/28–29.md), Paul uses “in order that” to introduce immediate goals, but here, **so that** is the overall goal. If your readers would misunderstand **so that**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a final or overall goal, making sure to distinguish it from the words you used in [1:28–29](../01/28–29.md), if possible. Alternate translation: “so that, in the end,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
164	1CO	1	29	q4gh	figs-idiom	μὴ…πᾶσα σὰρξ	1		Paul uses the word **flesh** to refer to humans. Unlike in many other places in his letters, **flesh** does not indicate sinful and weak humanity. Instead, it simply refers to humans compared to their creator, God. If your readers would misunderstand **flesh**, you could use a word or phrase that commonly refers to people in general, especially if it includes the idea that people are created by God. Alternate translation: “no creature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
165	1CO	1	29	fdv5	figs-metaphor	ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul speaks of people not boasting **before God**, as if they were standing in front of **God**. With this way of talking, Paul means that people are acting as if they could see God and God could see them. This means that they recognize that God knows what they say and do. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that someone recognizes that God knows what they are doing and thinking. Alternate translation: “when they know that God sees them” or “while God looks on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
166	1CO	1	30	yk4y	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, **But** introduces a slight contrast between people who might boast and the Corinthians who are united to Christ. However, **But** primarily means that Paul is moving to the next step in his argument. If **But** would not express this idea in your language, you could use a word that indicates that the author is moving on to the next step, or you could leave it untranslated. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
167	1CO	1	30	fmr3	figs-activepassive	ἐξ αὐτοῦ…ὑμεῖς ἐστε ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1	because of him	While **because of him, you are in Christ Jesus** is not written the way most passive sentences are, this construction is like a passive sentence and may be difficult to represent in your language. What **because of him** means is that God is the source of how the Corinthians **are in Christ Jesus**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could rephrase these words so that “God” is the subject who makes it so that **you are in Christ Jesus**. Alternate translation: “he puts you in Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
168	1CO	1	30	alyj	writing-pronouns	αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **of him** refers to God. If your readers would misunderstand to whom **him** refers, you could use the name “God” here. Alternate translation: “of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
169	1CO	1	30	a986	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ Jesus**, or united to Christ Jesus, explains how **Christ Jesus** can be **wisdom**, **righteousness**, **sanctification**, and **redemption** for the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “in union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
170	1CO	1	30	f1at	figs-metaphor	ὃς ἐγενήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ, δικαιοσύνη τε, καὶ ἁγιασμὸς, καὶ ἀπολύτρωσις;	1	Christ Jesus, who was made for us wisdom from God	Here Paul uses language and structure that is very similar to what he used in [1:24](../01/24.md). Refer back to that verse to help you translate this verse. When Paul says that Jesus **was made for us wisdom** and **righteousness, and also sanctification and redemption**, he does not mean that Jesus has become these abstract ideas. Instead, he means that Jesus is the source of **wisdom**, **righteousness**, **sanctification**, and **redemption** for **us** who are **in Christ Jesus**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could include some clarifying words such as “the source of.” Alternate translation: “who was made for us the source of wisdom from God, the source of righteousness, and also the source of sanctification and redemption” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
171	1CO	1	30	lxpy	figs-activepassive	ὃς ἐγενήθη σοφία ἡμῖν ἀπὸ Θεοῦ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **Christ Jesus**, who was **made**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “making.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “whom God made for us wisdom from himself” or “whom God made for us wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
172	1CO	1	30	yyns	writing-pronouns	ὃς	1		Here, **who** refers to **Christ Jesus**. If your readers would misunderstand to whom **who** refers, you could write the name of **Christ Jesus** instead of using **who** or along with **who**. Alternate translation: “the Christ who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
173	1CO	1	30	g5um	figs-abstractnouns	σοφία…ἀπὸ Θεοῦ, δικαιοσύνη τε, καὶ ἁγιασμὸς, καὶ ἀπολύτρωσις	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **wisdom**, **righteousness**, **sanctification**, and **redemption**, you could express the ideas by using verbs with God as the subject. Alternate translation: “a person through whom God taught us, judged us not guilty, and also set us apart for himself and set us free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
174	1CO	1	31	dm5h	grammar-connect-logic-result	ἵνα	1		Here, **so that** could introduce: (1) the result of everything he has said about God being the one who chooses and acts. If you use one of the following alternate translation, you may need to add period before it. Alternate translation: “Because of all this” or “Therefore” (2) the purpose for which God chose the weak and foolish. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
175	1CO	1	31	gtv0	figs-ellipsis	ἵνα καθὼς γέγραπται	1		Here Paul leaves out some words that might be required in your language to make a complete thought. If your language does need these words, you could supply words such as “we should do.” Alternate translation: “so that we should behave just as it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
176	1CO	1	31	paga	figs-infostructure	καθὼς γέγραπται, ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω	1		If it would be unnatural in your language to put **just as it is written** before the quotation, you could put **just as it is written** at the end of the sentence. Alternate translation: “‘Let the one who boasts, boast in the Lord,’ just as it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
177	1CO	1	31	ebvw	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		In Paul’s culture, **just as it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book written by Jeremiah the prophet (see [Jeremiah 9:24](../../jer/09/24.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament” or “according to Jeremiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
178	1CO	1	31	pfa7	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you could express it so that: (1) the scripture or scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “Jeremiah has written” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
179	1CO	1	31	fym9	figs-imperative	ὁ καυχώμενος, ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω	1	Let the one who boasts, boast in the Lord	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could: (1) translate this one as a conditional sentence, adding “if.” Alternate translation: “If people want to boast, they should boast in the Lord” (2) translate this one using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “Anyone who boasts should boast in the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
180	1CO	1	31	mo0q	figs-idiom	ἐν Κυρίῳ καυχάσθω	1		When Paul says that someone can **boast in the Lord**, he does not mean that they are inside **the Lord**. Rather, he means that they are boasting about **the Lord** and what he has done. If your readers would misunderstand **boast in the Lord**, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that someone is boasting about someone else. Alternate translation: “Let … boast with reference to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
181	1CO	2	intro	k86p			0		# 1 Corinthians 2 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)<br> * Paul’s attitude among the Corinthians (2:1–5)<br> * The wisdom of God, revealed by the Spirit (2:6–16)<br><br>Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the words of verses 9 and 16, which are from the Old Testament. Verse 9 quotes from Isaiah 64:4, and verse 16 quotes from Isaiah 40.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Wisdom and foolishness<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both wisdom and foolishness. Just as in chapter one, these words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. Continue to use the words you chose in chapter one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fool]])<br><br>### Power and weakness<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both power and weakness. Just as in chapter one, these words primarily refer to how much influence and authority a person has and to how much they can accomplish. Someone who has “power” has much influence and authority and can accomplish many things. Someone who has “weakness” does not have much influence and authority and is not able to accomplish many things. Continue to use the words that you chose in chapter one. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/power]])<br><br>### The Spirit<br><br>Paul first mentions the “Spirit” in this chapter. In most places where this word appears, it refers to God’s Spirit (the Holy Spirit), who is the third person of the Trinity. However, in two places in this chapter, the word “spirit” refers to something else. First, “spirit of the world” in [2:12](../02/12.md) refers to a “spirit” that is not God’s Spirit and that originates from within the world. Paul says that this kind of “spirit” is not the kind that believers in Jesus have received. Second, the “spirit of a man” in [2:11](../02/11.md) refers to the non-physical part of a person. It does not refer to God’s Spirit or to something that God’s Spirit replaces. Sometimes Paul uses the adjective form “spiritual” ([2:13](../02/13.md); [2:15](../02/15.md)) and the adverb form “spiritually” ([2:14](../02/14.md)). Both of these forms also refer to God’s Spirit. If someone or something is “spiritual,” that means that the person or thing has or is characterized by God’s Spirit. If something is done “spiritually,” that means that it is done by the power of God’s Spirit. Once, Paul uses the word “natural” ([2:14](../02/14.md)), which is the opposite of “spiritual.” “Natural” means that the person or thing does not have and is not characterized by God’s Spirit. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/holyspirit]])<br><br>### The Mystery<br><br>Paul speaks of a “mystery” in [2:1](../02/01.md); [2:7](../02/07.md). This “mystery” is not some secret truth that is hard to understand and that only a few privileged individuals can learn about. Instead, it refers to God’s plans that once were unknown but are now known to all his people. As Paul has already stated in chapter one, these plans center around the cross, which seems to be foolishness. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### The deep things of God<br><br>In [2:10](../02/10.md), Paul says that the Spirit searches “the deep things of God.” Paul talks about God as if he were a well or a lake with parts that are deep down in order to identify things about God that humans cannot understand or find it difficult to understand. He does not mean that God is a being or location with deep parts. See the note on this verse for translation options.<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### The rulers of this age<br><br>In [2:6](../02/06.md); [2:8](../02/08.md), Paul speaks about “the rulers of this age.” This phrase refers to individuals who have power in the created world during the time between Christ’s first and second comings. While Paul does not state whether these individuals with power are humans or spiritual beings, he does say that they were the ones who crucified Jesus ([2:8](../02/08.md)). This suggests that they are humans, and they would be people like governors, emperors, and unfaithful religious leaders. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/ruler]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/age]])<br><br>### Positive and negative uses of “wisdom”<br><br>Just as in chapter one, Paul continues to speak about wisdom in both positive and negative ways. He uses the same words throughout the chapter, and he distinguishes between positive and negative meanings by connecting the words to different people or ideas. For example, he speaks of wisdom negatively when it is the wisdom of the world, or the wisdom of humans. However, he speaks of wisdom positively when it is wisdom from God or wisdom given by God. If possible, translate the negative and positive meanings of wisdom with the same word, just as Paul uses one word for both negative and positive. If you must use different words, use positive words for God’s wisdom and negative words for human wisdom.<br><br>### First-person singular and plural<br><br>Paul uses the first-person singular in [2:1–5](../02/01–05.md) because in these verses he speaks of his own time among the Corinthians. He switches to the first-person plural in [2:6–16](../02/06–16.md) because in these verses he is speaking more generally about everyone who proclaims the Gospel as he does. In [2:6–16](../02/06–16.md), the first-person plural sometimes includes the Corinthians and sometimes does not include the Corinthians. Throughout the chapter, the first-person plural will include the Corinthians unless a note specifies that it does not include them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
182	1CO	2	1	pxmq	grammar-connect-words-phrases	κἀγὼ	1		Here, **And I** introduces how Paul himself fits into the pattern he introduced in the last chapter. Just as God chooses the weak and the foolish, Paul preaches the gospel in weak and foolish ways. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that introduces an example or a comparison. Alternate translation: “In the same way, I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
183	1CO	2	1	qvj7	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to both men or women. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
184	1CO	2	1	koh8	figs-explicitinfo	ἐλθὼν πρὸς ὑμᾶς…ἦλθον οὐ	1		Here Paul twice says that he has **come** to them. This is a structure that makes sense in Paul’s language. However, if your readers would misunderstand this repetition, you could: (1) translate the first **come** with a different word, such as “visit.” Alternate translation: “having visited you, did not come” (2) combine these two phrases. Alternate translation: “did not come to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
185	1CO	2	1	o0vw	grammar-connect-time-background	ἐλθὼν πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1		The phrase **having come to you** gives background information. It describes what happened before Paul **did not come with superiority of speech or of wisdom**. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could clarify by using a word that introduces action that has already occurred. Alternate translation: “after I came to you” or “when I came to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
186	1CO	2	1	mioj	figs-go	ἐλθὼν πρὸς ὑμᾶς…ἦλθον οὐ	1		Here Paul is speaking about how he had previously visited the Corinthians. Use a form in your language that refers to a past visit. Alternate translation: “after arriving where you live, did arrive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
187	1CO	2	1	o3ks	figs-possession	ὑπεροχὴν λόγου ἢ σοφίας	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **speech** and **wisdom** that have **superiority**. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this form, you could express the idea by translating **superiority** as an adjective. Alternate translation: “superior speech or superior wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
188	1CO	2	1	ikmt	translate-unknown	ὑπεροχὴν λόγου ἢ σοφίας	1		Here, **superiority** refers to how something or someone has more authority, skill, knowledge, or power than something or someone else. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this word, you could express the idea with a comparable word or a short description. Alternate translation: “greatness of speech or of wisdom” or “speech or wisdom that was better than what others have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
189	1CO	2	1	kxie	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	καταγγέλλων ὑμῖν τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		The phrase **proclaiming to you the mystery of God** gives the situation in which Paul **did not come with superiority of speech or of wisdom**. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could make it explicit by including a word that indicates that these things are happening at the same time. Alternate translation: “meanwhile proclaiming to you the mystery of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
190	1CO	2	1	nam8	figs-possession	τὸ μυστήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **mystery** that is: (1) revealed by God. Alternate translation: “the mystery given by God” or “the mystery from God” (2) about God. Alternate translation: “the mystery about God” or “the mystery concerning God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
191	1CO	2	1	xu7t	translate-textvariants	μυστήριον	1		In Paul’s language, **mystery** and “testimony” look and sound very similar. While some early and important manuscripts have “testimony” here, other early and important manuscripts have **mystery**. Unless there is a good reason to translate “testimony,” it is best to follow the ULT here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
192	1CO	2	2	a2g9	figs-hyperbole	οὐ…ἔκρινά τι εἰδέναι ἐν ὑμῖν, εἰ μὴ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν	1	I decided to know nothing … except Jesus Christ	Here Paul speaks as if he decides to forget all his knowledge and become ignorant of everything except **Jesus Christ**. This is an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood as emphasis on Paul’s sharp focus on **Jesus Christ** as the one thing he wished to tell the Corinthians about. If your readers would misunderstand this exaggeration, you could use a phrase that indicates that it is an exaggeration or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I decided to speak among you only about Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
193	1CO	2	2	nk9r	grammar-connect-exceptions	οὐ…ἔκρινά τι εἰδέναι ἐν ὑμῖν, εἰ μὴ Ἰησοῦν Χριστὸν, καὶ τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον	1		If it would appear in your language that Paul makes a strong statement about knowing nothing and then contradicts it, you could reword this sentence so that there is no **except**. Alternate translation: “I decided that among you I would only know Jesus Christ and him crucified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
194	1CO	2	2	zvge	figs-activepassive	τοῦτον ἐσταυρωμένον	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **Jesus Christ** who was **crucified** rather than the person doing the “crucifying.” If you must state who does the action, you could express the idea with: (1) **Christ** as the subject. Alternate translation: “how he laid down his life on the cross” (2) an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “how they crucified him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
195	1CO	2	3	xen3	grammar-connect-words-phrases	κἀγὼ	1		Here, **And I** is the same word Paul used to introduce [2:1](../02/01.md). It again introduces how Paul himself fits into the pattern he introduced in the last chapter. Just as God chooses the weak and the foolish, Paul himself was weak and foolish. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that introduces an example or a comparison. Alternate translation: “Just as I did not use superior words and wisdom, I myself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
196	1CO	2	3	s9lp		κἀγὼ…ἐγενόμην πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	I was with you	Alternate translation: “And I remained with you”
197	1CO	2	3	e8li	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀσθενείᾳ, καὶ ἐν φόβῳ, καὶ ἐν τρόμῳ πολλῷ,	1	in weakness	If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **weakness**, **fear**, and **trembling**, you could express the ideas by using adjectives or verbs. Alternate translation: “as a weak, fearful, and frequently trembling person” or “while I ailed, feared, and often trembled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
198	1CO	2	4	lewv	figs-ellipsis	ὁ λόγος μου καὶ τὸ κήρυγμά μου, οὐκ ἐν πειθοῖς σοφίας λόγοις	1		Here Paul does not use the verb **were** in his sentence. In English, this word is essential, so it has been included in the ULT. If you can translate this sentence without **were**, you could do so here. Otherwise, you could retain **were** as it appears in the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
199	1CO	2	4	g5my	figs-abstractnouns	ὁ λόγος μου καὶ τὸ κήρυγμά μου, οὐκ	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **word** and **proclamation**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “speak” or “talk” and “proclaim.” Alternate translation: “I spoke and proclaimed a message not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
200	1CO	2	4	m23e	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν πειθοῖς σοφίας λόγοις	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **words** and **wisdom**, you could express the ideas by using a verb such as “speak” or “talk” and an adverb such as “wisely.” Alternate translation: “based on speaking persuasively and wisely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
201	1CO	2	4	hl7e	figs-possession	σοφίας λόγοις	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify the **words** as containing **wisdom**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea by translating **wisdom** with an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “wise words” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
202	1CO	2	4	chtx	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀποδείξει Πνεύματος καὶ δυνάμεως;	1		Here Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If your language needs these words, you could add them here, supplying the idea from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “but my word and my proclamation were with a demonstration of the Spirit and of power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
203	1CO	2	4	kgnb	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀποδείξει Πνεύματος καὶ δυνάμεως	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **demonstration** and **power**, you could express the ideas by using a verb such as “demonstrate” or “show” and an adverb such as “powerfully.” Alternate translation: “based on demonstrating the Spirit and how he works powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
204	1CO	2	4	qrfj	figs-possession	ἀποδείξει Πνεύματος καὶ δυνάμεως	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **demonstration** that: (1) comes from **the Spirit** and **power**. Alternate translation: “a demonstration by the Spirit and by power” (2) proves that the **Spirit** and **power** are present. Alternate translation: “a demonstration of the presence of the Spirit and of power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
205	1CO	2	4	s83h	translate-unknown	ἀποδείξει	1		Here, **demonstration** refers to proving or showing that something is true. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this word, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “a validation” or “a confirmation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
206	1CO	2	4	s6h6	figs-hendiadys	Πνεύματος καὶ δυνάμεως	1		This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **Spirit** tells who is acting in **power**. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “of the Spirit’s power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
207	1CO	2	5	av3t	figs-idiom	ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν, μὴ ᾖ ἐν σοφίᾳ ἀνθρώπων, ἀλλ’ ἐν δυνάμει Θεοῦ	1		Here, the phrase translated **faith might not be in the wisdom of men but in** refers to believing something (**faith**) based on (**in**) something else. It does not refer, as it does in many other places, to believing in or trusting in something. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this phrase, you could translate **in** with a word or phrase that indicates the basis of the **faith**. Alternate translation: “your faith might not be based on the wisdom of men but based on the power of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
208	1CO	2	5	ovoj	figs-abstractnouns	ἡ πίστις ὑμῶν, μὴ ᾖ	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could express the idea in active form by translating **faith** with a verb such as “trust” or “believe.” Alternate translation: “you might believe not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
209	1CO	2	5	rkoy	figs-possession	σοφίᾳ ἀνθρώπων	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe what **men** think is **wisdom**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea by translating **men** with an adjective such as “human.” Alternate translation: “in human wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
210	1CO	2	5	cdw7	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων	1		Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **men**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
211	1CO	2	5	b29d	figs-possession	δυνάμει Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to speak of **power** that **God** has and shows. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this phrase, you could express the idea by translating **power** as a verb or adverb with **God** as the subject. Alternate translation: “God working powerfully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
212	1CO	2	6	azm7	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	Now we do speak	Here, **Now** introduces a contrast with what Paul has said in [2:4–5](../02/4–5.md). In those verses, he said that he did not speak with **wisdom**. In this verse, however, he clarifies that he does **speak** with **wisdom** of a certain kind. If your readers would misunderstand **Now**, you could express the idea by using a word that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “In spite of this,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
213	1CO	2	6	uena	figs-exclusive	λαλοῦμεν	1		Here, **we** refers to Paul and others like him who preach the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
214	1CO	2	6	uka3	figs-abstractnouns	σοφίαν	-1	speak wisdom	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **wisdom**, you could express the idea by using by using an adverb such as “wisely” or an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “wisely … the wise speech” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
215	1CO	2	6	eq1q	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς τελείοις	1	the mature	Paul is using the adjective **mature** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate **mature** with a noun phrase or a relative clause. Alternate translation: “those who are mature” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
216	1CO	2	6	tm2e	figs-possession	σοφίαν δὲ, οὐ τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου, οὐδὲ τῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **wisdom** that fits with the standards and values of **this age** and that **rulers of this age** value. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea by using verbal phrases. Alternate translation: “but not wisdom that fits with this age nor wisdom that the rulers of this age value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
217	1CO	2	6	xn85	figs-ellipsis	σοφίαν δὲ, οὐ	1		Here Paul omits some words that may be needed in your language to make this a complete thought. If your language does need these words, you could supply them from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “but we do not speak wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
218	1CO	2	6	xydl	figs-possession	τῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **rulers** who are in power during **this age**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea by using language about the time in which the rulers have power or the place in which they have power. Alternate translation: “of the rulers who have power now” or “of the rulers who control this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
219	1CO	2	6	endk	translate-unknown	τῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		The **rulers of this age** could refer to: (1) humans who have power. Alternate translation: “of the people who rule this age” (2) spiritual beings that have power. Alternate translation: “of the spiritual powers that rule this age” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
220	1CO	2	6	tbnh	translate-unknown	τῶν καταργουμένων	1		Paul has already used the word translated **passing away** in [1:28](../01/28.md), where it is translated **bring to nothing**. Here, the word means that the **rulers** are becoming ineffective, useless, or irrelevant, which means that they will no longer have power. If possible, translate this word like you did in [1:28](../01/28.md). Alternate translation: “who are becoming ineffective” or “who are losing their power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
221	1CO	2	7	l064	figs-exclusive	λαλοῦμεν…ἡμῶν	1		Here, **we** refers to Paul and anyone who preaches the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. However, the word **our** does include the Corinthians along with Paul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
222	1CO	2	7	bsme	figs-possession	Θεοῦ σοφίαν	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **wisdom** that **God** would consider to be true **wisdom**. This also means that the **wisdom** comes from **God**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could clarify that the **wisdom** comes from **God**. Alternate translation: “the wisdom from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
223	1CO	2	7	wy8u	figs-abstractnouns	σοφίαν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **wisdom**, you could express the idea by using by using an adverb such as “wisely” or an adjective such as “wise.” Alternate translation: “the wise message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
224	1CO	2	7	xbye	figs-explicitinfo	ἐν μυστηρίῳ τὴν ἀποκεκρυμμένην	1		Here Paul uses both **has been hidden** and **in a mystery**. Both of these phrases refer to something that is secret. If using both of these phrases is redundant in your language, you could use only one. Alternate translation: “that has been hidden” or “that is a mystery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
225	1CO	2	7	fd3s	figs-activepassive	τὴν ἀποκεκρυμμένην	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **the wisdom** that has **been hidden** rather than the person doing the “hiding.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “that God has hidden” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
226	1CO	2	7	ctb4	writing-pronouns	ἣν	1		Here, **that** refers to **the wisdom**, not **a mystery**. If your readers would misunderstand what **that** refers to, you could repeat **wisdom** here. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
227	1CO	2	7	k2ct	figs-idiom	πρὸ τῶν αἰώνων	1	before the ages	Paul uses the phrase translated **before the ages** to say that God **predestined** before he made anything. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this phrase, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “before the beginning of time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
228	1CO	2	7	q2z9	grammar-connect-logic-goal	εἰς δόξαν ἡμῶν	1	for our glory	Here, the phrase translated **for our glory** introduces the purpose for which **God predestined** the **wisdom**. If your readers would misunderstand **for our glory**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “so that we might have glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
229	1CO	2	8	bw5i	writing-pronouns	ἣν	1		Just as in [2:7](../02/07.md), **which** refers to “the wisdom,” not to “a mystery.” If your readers would misunderstand what **which** refers to, you could repeat “wisdom” here. Alternate translation: “the wisdom that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
230	1CO	2	8	imbk	figs-possession	τῶν ἀρχόντων τοῦ αἰῶνος τούτου	1		Just as in [2:6](../02/06.md), Paul uses the possessive form to describe **rulers** who are in power during **this age**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea by using language about the time in which **the rulers** have power or the place in which they have power. Alternate translation: “of the rulers who have power now” or “of the rulers who control this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
231	1CO	2	8	ur15	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, **for** introduces Paul’s proof that **the rulers** did not understand. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this word, you could express the idea using a word that customarily introduces proof or evidence. Alternate translation: “which is true because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
232	1CO	2	8	ji1o	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	εἰ…ἔγνωσαν, οὐκ ἂν τὸν Κύριον τῆς δόξης ἐσταύρωσαν;	1		Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a scenario that he knows is not true. He wants to point out that the **rulers** were the ones who **crucified** Jesus, and this proves that they did not understand God’s wisdom. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea by reversing the two clauses and making **they understood it** negative and **they would not have crucified the Lord of glory** positive. Alternate translation: “they crucified the Lord of glory, which means that they did not understand it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
233	1CO	2	8	zc89	figs-possession	τὸν Κύριον τῆς δόξης	1	the Lord of glory	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **the Lord** who has **glory**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea by translating **glory** with an adjective or a relative clause. Alternate translation: “the Lord, who has glory” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
234	1CO	2	9	fu1y	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1	Things that no eye … arisen, the things … who love him	Here, **But** introduces a contrast with the hypothetical statement in [2:8](../02/08.md) about how the rulers would not have crucified the Lord if they had understood God’s wisdom. The **But** reminds the reader that this hypothetical statement is not true, and Paul wishes to introduce further statements about how people do not understand God’s wisdom. If your readers would misunderstand **But**, you could leave **But** untranslated or use a word or phrase that would signal that Paul is no longer speaking hypothetically. Alternate translation: “But instead,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
235	1CO	2	9	wuar	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ καθὼς γέγραπται	1		Here Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary in your language to form a complete thought. If necessary, you can supply a summary from [2:8](../02/08.md) of what the rulers did not understand and how they acted. Alternate translation: “But the rulers did not understand, just as it is written” or “But the rulers did do these things, just as it is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
236	1CO	2	9	qcb2	writing-quotations	καθὼς γέγραπται	1		In Paul’s culture, **just as it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book written by Isaiah the prophet (see [Isaiah 64:4](../../isa/64/04.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “as it can be read in the Old Testament” or “according to Isaiah the prophet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
237	1CO	2	9	w3m2	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you could express it so that: (1) the scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “Isaiah has written” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
238	1CO	2	9	pt3m	figs-infostructure	ἃ ὀφθαλμὸς οὐκ εἶδεν, καὶ οὖς οὐκ ἤκουσεν, καὶ ἐπὶ καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἀνέβη, ἃ ἡτοίμασεν ὁ Θεὸς τοῖς ἀγαπῶσιν αὐτόν	1		In this quotation, **What eye has not seen, and ear has not heard, and has not arisen in the heart of man** are the **things God has prepared**. If your language would naturally put **What eye has not seen, and ear has not heard, and has not arisen in the heart of man** after **God has prepared**, you could reverse the order. Alternate translation: “God has prepared for those who love him what eye has not seen, and ear has not heard, and has not arisen in the heart of man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
239	1CO	2	9	j9ib	figs-synecdoche	ἃ ὀφθαλμὸς οὐκ εἶδεν, καὶ οὖς οὐκ ἤκουσεν, καὶ ἐπὶ καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἀνέβη	1	Things that no eye has seen, no ear has heard, no mind has imagined	Here, the words **eye**, **ear**, and **heart** refer to the parts of the person that see, hear, and think. In each case, the word means that the whole person sees, hears, and thinks. If your readers would misunderstand this way of speaking, you could use a word that refers to a person as a whole instead of just a part of that person. Alternate translation: “What a person has not seen, and a person has not heard, and has not arisen when a person thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
240	1CO	2	9	xe03	figs-idiom	ἐπὶ καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου οὐκ ἀνέβη	1		The phrase **heart of man** refers to the place where humans think. If something “arises” there, that means that a human has thought about that thing. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of **arisen in the heart of man**, you could use a comparable phrase or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “man has not thought about” or “man has not imagined” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
241	1CO	2	9	pigi	figs-possession	καρδίαν ἀνθρώπου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **heart** that belongs to a **man**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could translate **man** with an adjective such as “human.” Alternate translation: “the human heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
242	1CO	2	9	yw0a	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπου	1		Although **man** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **man**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “of people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
243	1CO	2	9	us5y	grammar-collectivenouns	ἀνθρώπου	1		Here, even though **man** is written in singular form, it refers to anyone who would be considered a **man**, that is, any human. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you can make **man** plural. Alternate translation: “of men” or “of humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
244	1CO	2	10	z472	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** introduces an explanation of the last line of the quote from [2:9](../02/09.md): “these things God has prepared for those who love him.” Paul wants to explain that these are the things that **God has revealed** to those who believe. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could leave the word untranslated or use a word or phrase that introduces an explanation. Alternate translation: “In fact,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
245	1CO	2	10	hp6w	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	2		Here, **For** introduces an explanation for why God’s revelation is made **to us through the Spirit**. It is because the **Spirit searches everything** and knows everything that is **revealed**. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces this kind of explanation. Alternate translation: “He works through the Spirit because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
246	1CO	2	10	zccl	translate-unknown	ἐραυνᾷ	1		Here, **searches** refers to how someone can explore or seek to know about something else. If your readers would misunderstand **searches**, you could use another word for “exploring” or “knowing.” Alternate translation: “comprehends” or “knows about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
247	1CO	2	10	bhyv	translate-unknown	τὰ βάθη τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		The phrase **deep things of God** refers to things about God that are hard to understand or things about God that no one can fully comprehend. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a comparable expression or state the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “secrets about God” or “things about God that no one knows” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
248	1CO	2	11	h4p8	figs-rquestion	τίς γὰρ οἶδεν ἀνθρώπων τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, εἰ μὴ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ?	1	For who knows a person’s thoughts except the spirit of the person in him?	Here Paul uses a question because he thinks that everyone will agree with him, for this information is common knowledge in his culture. He does not use a question because he is not sure about the answer. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea by using a form that presents information that everyone knows and agrees with. Alternate translation: “For it is a well-known fact that no one among men knows the things of a man except the spirit of the man that {is} within him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
249	1CO	2	11	gw3u	grammar-connect-exceptions	τίς γὰρ οἶδεν ἀνθρώπων τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου, εἰ μὴ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ? οὕτως καὶ τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ οὐδεὶς ἔγνωκεν, εἰ μὴ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ.	1	no one knows the deep things of God except the Spirit of God	In both parts of this verse, Paul makes a negative claim and then offers an exception to that claim. If it would appear in your language that Paul is contradicting himself, you could use a different structure that also singles out one possibility and negates all other possibilities. Alternate translation: “For the spirit of the man that {is} within him is the only one among men that knows the things of a man, right? So also, the Spirit of God is the only one that knows the things of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
250	1CO	2	11	li8e	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπων…ἀνθρώπου…τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ	1		Although the words translated **men**, **man**, and **him** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand these masculine words, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “among people … of a person … of the person that {is} within that person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
251	1CO	2	11	lmzi	figs-genericnoun	ἀνθρώπου…τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ	1		Paul uses the word **man** to speak of people in general, not one specific person. If your readers would misunderstand **man**, you could use a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “of a certain man … of that certain man that {is} within him” or “of men … of men that {is} within them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
252	1CO	2	11	wfr2	figs-idiom	τίς…ἀνθρώπων	1		The phrase **who among men** is a way of asking about people or things that belong to a specific category. Paul means to ask if there are any **men** who can know **the things of a man**. He uses this phrase because God also **knows the things of a man**, so he must limit his question to only **men**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea by using a phrase that asks about people or things, but only those that belong in a specific category. Alternate translation: “which man” or “out of all men, who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
253	1CO	2	11	mi27	figs-idiom	τὰ τοῦ ἀνθρώπου…τὰ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the phrases **the things of a man** and **the things of God** to refer to everything that makes up the person, including personality, thoughts, actions, desires, possessions, and many more similar categories. Paul is intentionally general and does not narrow down which of these categories he has in mind. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use an expression that refers to all the aspects of a person that makes that person unique. Alternate translation: “all the details about a man … all the details about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
254	1CO	2	11	i47d	translate-unknown	τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ	1	spirit of the person	Here, the word translated **spirit** is the same word that Paul uses for the Holy **Spirit**. It refers to the interior life of a person, to the part of them that people cannot see, including their thoughts and desires. If possible, use the same word here that you will use later in the verse for the **Spirit**, since Paul is drawing an analogy between the human **spirit** and God’s **Spirit**. If you cannot use the word for God’s **Spirit** to describe a human being, you could: (1) refer simply to a human without specifying which part of the human **knows**. Alternate translation: “the man himself” (2) use an expression that refers to the interior life of a human. Alternate translation: “the consciousness of the man that {is} within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
255	1CO	2	11	to3t	figs-idiom	τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ ἀνθρώπου τὸ ἐν αὐτῷ	1		In this culture, people would speak of the nonphysical part of a human being as if it were inside the physical part of a human being. Here Paul speaks in this way when he says that the **spirit of the man** is **within him**. By using **within him**, Paul is identifying the **spirit** as the one that belongs to **the man**. It is not some other man’s **spirit**. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of **within him**, you could: (1) use a word or phrase that identifies that the **spirit** belongs to **the man** only. Alternate translation: “that man’s own spirit” (2) express the idea by using a phrase that describes where a human being’s non-physical part would be in your culture. Alternate translation: “the spirit of the man that permeates him” or “the spirit of the man that suffuses him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
256	1CO	2	12	zbv8	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	General Information:	Here, **But** introduces the next part of Paul’s argument. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of **But**, you could leave it untranslated or use a word or phrase that signifies that the argument is moving on. Alternate translation: “Now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
257	1CO	2	12	evts	figs-infostructure	ἡμεῖς…οὐ τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κόσμου ἐλάβομεν, ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If your language would naturally state the negative before the positive, you could reverse the order of the **not** statement and the **but** statement. Alternate translation: “we received the Spirit who {is} from God, not the spirit of the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
258	1CO	2	12	emse	translate-unknown	τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κόσμου	1		The phrase **spirit of the world** could refer to: (1) a **spirit** that does not actually exist. In other words, Paul is saying that the Spirit they received did not come from the **world** but rather came from **God**. Alternate translation: “a spirit that comes from the world” (2) human ways of thinking and understanding, which could be called a **spirit**. In other words, Paul is saying that they did not receive human ways of thinking but rather ways of thinking that God’s Spirit brings. Alternate translation: “human ways of thinking” ((See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
259	1CO	2	12	ev7j	figs-possession	τὸ πνεῦμα τοῦ κόσμου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **spirit** that comes from or has its source in **the world**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that **the world** is the source or origin of this **spirit**. Alternate translation: “the spirit from the world” or “the spirit that comes from the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
260	1CO	2	12	vw4v	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλὰ τὸ Πνεῦμα	1		Here Paul omits some words that may be needed in your language to make a complete thought. If your readers would misunderstand this shortened form, you could supply some words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but we received the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
261	1CO	2	12	w1qd	figs-activepassive	τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ ἐκ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could make God the subject of the **who** statement. Alternate translation: “the Spirit whom God sent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
262	1CO	2	12	n1c7	figs-activepassive	τὰ ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ χαρισθέντα ἡμῖν	1	freely given to us by God	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **the things** that are **given** rather than God, who does the “giving.” Alternate translation: “the things that God has freely given to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
263	1CO	2	13	nan2	figs-exclusive	λαλοῦμεν	1		Here, **we** refers to Paul and others who proclaim the gospel with him. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
264	1CO	2	13	u797	figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἐν διδακτοῖς ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας λόγοις, ἀλλ’ ἐν διδακτοῖς Πνεύματος	1	The Spirit interprets spiritual words with spiritual wisdom	If your language would not naturally put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse them, putting **words** with the positive statement. Alternate translation: “in words taught by the Spirit, not in those taught by human wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
265	1CO	2	13	yg45	figs-activepassive	διδακτοῖς ἀνθρωπίνης σοφίας λόγοις	1	The Spirit interprets spiritual words with spiritual wisdom	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **words** that are **taught** rather than focusing on the person doing the “teaching.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “humans” or “people” do it. Alternate translation: “words that human wisdom teaches” or “words that humans teach as wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
266	1CO	2	13	ywbw	figs-activepassive	διδακτοῖς Πνεύματος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **words** that are **taught** rather than the **Spirit**, who does the “teaching.” Alternate translation: “those that the Spirit teaches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
267	1CO	2	13	gueq	translate-unknown	πνευματικοῖς πνευματικὰ συνκρίνοντες	1		Here, the phrase **combining spiritual things with spiritual words** could mean: (1) that Paul and those with him interpret **spiritual things** and ideas with **spiritual words**. Alternate translation: “interpreting spiritual things with spiritual words” (2) that Paul and those with him explain **spiritual things** to **spiritual** people. Alternate translation: “explaining spiritual things to spiritual people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
268	1CO	2	13	kinz	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	συνκρίνοντες	1		Here, **combining** introduces an action that takes place at the same time as when **we speak**. The idea is that **combining spiritual things with spiritual words** is the way that **we speak these things**. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could express the idea by including a word or phrase that indicates that **combining** is the way in which **we speak**. Alternate translation: “by means of combining” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
269	1CO	2	13	mnpq	translate-unknown	συνκρίνοντες	1		Here, **combining** could mean: (1) interpreting or explaining an idea. Alternate translation: “interpreting” (2) putting two things together, either to compare or blend them together. Alternate translation: “comparing” or “compounding” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
270	1CO	2	14	i8jw	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Here, **But** introduces a new part of Paul’s argument, and it also introduces a contrast with how Paul and those with him speak by the power of the Spirit in [2:13](../02/13.md). Unlike Paul and those with him, the **natural person** does not have the Spirit and does not use spiritual words. If your readers would misunderstand **But**, you could leave it untranslated or use a word that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
271	1CO	2	14	hq3u	translate-unknown	ψυχικὸς…ἄνθρωπος	1	unspiritual person	The phrase **the natural person** describes a person who does not have God’s Spirit. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this phrase, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that describes someone who has not received God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the person without the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
272	1CO	2	14	cve2	figs-genericnoun	ψυχικὸς…ἄνθρωπος, οὐ δέχεται…αὐτῷ…οὐ δύναται	1	General Information:	Paul uses the words **person**, **him**, and **he** to speak of people in general, not one specific man. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of these words, you could use a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “any natural person does not receive … to him or her … he or she is not able” or “natural people do not receive … to them … they are not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
273	1CO	2	14	vvju	figs-gendernotations	αὐτῷ…οὐ δύναται	1		Here, the words translated **him** and **he** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If your readers would misunderstand **he** and **him**, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “to that person … that person is not able” or “to him or her … he or she is not able” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
274	1CO	2	14	fye5	figs-activepassive	μωρία…αὐτῷ ἐστίν	1		If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the structure and make **him** the subject of a verb such as “think” or “consider.” Alternate translation: “for he thinks that they are foolishness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
275	1CO	2	14	gwe3	figs-activepassive	πνευματικῶς ἀνακρίνεται	1	because they are spiritually discerned	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **discerned** rather than focusing on the person doing the “discerning.” If you must state who does the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “people can only discern them spiritually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
276	1CO	2	14	vznr		πνευματικῶς ἀνακρίνεται	1		Alternate translation: “they are discerned by the power of the Spirit” or “they are discerned by people who are indwelt by the Spirit”
277	1CO	2	15	w4q7	translate-unknown	ὁ…πνευματικὸς	1	the one who is spiritual	Here Paul uses **the spiritual one** as the opposite of “the natural person” in [2:14](../02/14.md). The phrase **the spiritual one** describes a person who does have God’s Spirit. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this phrase, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that describes someone who has received God’s Spirit. Alternate translation: “the person with the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
278	1CO	2	15	gcv7	figs-genericnoun	ὁ…πνευματικὸς ἀνακρίνει…αὐτὸς…ἀνακρίνεται	1		Paul uses the words **spiritual one** and **he himself** to speak of people in general, not one specific man. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of these words, you could use a form that indicates people in general. Alternate translation: “any spiritual person discerns … he himself or she herself” or “spiritual people discern … they themselves are discerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
279	1CO	2	15	ap89	figs-hyperbole	τὰ πάντα	1		Here Paul uses **all things** as an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to emphasize that the **spiritual one** can discern God’s gifts and the message of the gospel. Paul does not mean that every **spiritual** person is able to discern everything there is to know. If your readers would misunderstand this exaggeration, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “many things,” and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “many things indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
280	1CO	2	15	ji5n	figs-activepassive	αὐτὸς…ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς ἀνακρίνεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **he** who is **discerned** rather than the person doing the “discerning.” Alternate translation: “no one discerns him himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
281	1CO	2	15	ypl6	figs-gendernotations	αὐτὸς…ἀνακρίνεται	1		Here, the words translated **he himself** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If your readers would misunderstand **he himself**, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “that person is discerned” or “he himself or she herself is discerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
282	1CO	2	15	zg4b	figs-explicit	αὐτὸς…ὑπ’ οὐδενὸς ἀνακρίνεται	1		Here Paul wishes to say that it is impossible for someone without the Spirit to properly understand or make judgments about the person who does have the Spirit. If this implication would be missed by your readers, you could make it more explicit that Paul is speaking about the impossibility of someone without the Spirit “discerning” someone with the Spirit. Alternate translation: “he himself cannot be discerned by anyone who is not spiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
283	1CO	2	15	ndi1	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς…ἀνακρίνεται	1		Here, **himself** focuses attention on **the spiritual one**. If **himself** would not draw attention in this way in your language, you could express the attention or focus in another way. Alternate translation: “he is discerned” or “he indeed is discerned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
284	1CO	2	16	ye98	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** introduces proof from Scripture to support what Paul has said about the “natural person” and the “spiritual” person in [2:14–15](../02/14–15.md). If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is introducing proof. Alternate translation: “You can tell that these things are true, because” or “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
285	1CO	2	16	tj79	writing-quotations	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** is the only word that Paul uses to introduce a quotation from the Old Testament, in this case, from the book written by Isaiah the prophet (see [Isaiah 40:13](../../isa/40/13.md)). If your language would not introduce a quotation in this way, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For, as it can be read in the Old Testament,” or “For, according to Isaiah the prophet,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
286	1CO	2	16	m4pu	figs-rquestion	τίς…ἔγνω νοῦν Κυρίου, ὃς συμβιβάσει αὐτόν?	1	For who can know the mind of the Lord, that he can instruct him?	Here, the passage that Paul quotes from the book of Isaiah uses a question to indicate that no human **has known the mind of the Lord**, and no human **will instruct him**. The quoted question is not asking for information. Instead, it assumes that the answer is “no one,” and the author used a question to make a negative claim that is stronger than a simple statement. If your readers would misunderstand the question, you could express the idea with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “no one has known the mind of the Lord—no one will instruct him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
287	1CO	2	16	wacc	figs-possession	νοῦν Κυρίου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **mind** that the **Lord** has or uses. If your readers would misunderstand that the **Lord** is one who is thinking with **the mind**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “the thoughts that the Lord thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
288	1CO	2	16	r18k	figs-metaphor	νοῦν Χριστοῦ ἔχομεν	1		Here Paul speaks as if **we** are people who possess **the mind of Christ**. Paul means that **we** are able to understand what Christ thinks and share the same ways of thinking with him. He does not mean that we have taken Christ’s **mind** from him or that we no longer have our own **mind**. If your readers would misunderstand “having someone else’s mind,” you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or with a verb such as “share.” Alternate translation: “think the same thoughts as Christ does” or “share in the mind of Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
289	1CO	2	16	pr9b	figs-possession	νοῦν Χριστοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **mind** that **Christ** has or uses. If your readers would misunderstand that **Christ** is the one who is thinking with **the mind**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase. Alternate translation: “the thoughts that Christ thinks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
290	1CO	3	intro	g6ku			0		# 1 Corinthians 3 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)<br> * Paul identifies the divisions (3:1–5)<br> * Farming metaphor (3:6–9a)<br> * Building metaphor (3:9b–15<br> * Temple metaphor (3:16–17)<br> * Wisdom and folly (3:18–20)<br> * All things are yours (3:21–23)<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verses 19 and 20. Verse 19 quotes from Job 5:13, and verse 20 quotes from Psalm 94:11.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Fleshly people<br><br>In [3:1–4](../03/01–04.md), Paul calls the Corinthian believers “fleshly.” In [3:3](../03/03.md), he defines “fleshly” as “walking according to men.” The word “fleshly” thus refers to people who think and behave from a merely human point of view, without thinking and behaving from God’s perspective. The opposite of “fleshly” is “spiritual,” which refers to those who think and behave by the power of the Spirit (see [3:1](../0/01.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/flesh]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])<br><br>### Fire and judgment<br><br>In Paul’s culture, fire was commonly associated with the day when God would come to judge everyone. Paul uses this association when he makes use of the metaphor of a building. When a building catches on fire, it shows how well it was built. Similarly, when the fire of God’s judgment comes, it will show who has taught the gospel correctly. Fire fits within the metaphor of a building, but it is not just a part of that metaphor. If it is possible, retain the language of fire for God’s judgment. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judgmentday]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fire]])<br><br>### Wisdom and foolishness<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul continues to speak of both wisdom and foolishness. Just as in chapters one and two, these words do not refer primarily to how much or how little education someone has. Rather, they refer to how well or how poorly someone plans actions and knows how the world works. Continue to use the words you chose in chapters one and two. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/wise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/fool]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Infants and food metaphor<br><br>In [3:1–2](../03/01–02.md), Paul speaks as if the Corinthians are infants who were, and still are, unable to eat any solid food, but can only drink milk. By speaking about them as if they were infants, Paul wishes to tell the Corinthians that they are spiritually immature enough that they can only drink milk. Paul uses “milk” to refer to the very basic teachings about Christ, while he uses “solid food” to refer to the more advanced teachings. In translating this metaphor, use words that identify what very small children can eat (milk) and what they cannot eat (solid food). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])<br><br>### Farming metaphor<br><br>In [3:6–9a](../03/06–09.md), Paul speaks as if he and Apollos were farmers. Paul first proclaimed the gospel to the Corinthians, so he is like a farmer who plants seeds. Apollos taught the Corinthians more about the gospel, so he is like a farmer who waters the plants when they start to grow. However, God is the one who makes seeds grow into plants and the one who enables believers to accept and learn more about the gospel. With this metaphor, Paul wishes to emphasize that he and Apollos are equal in that they both teach about the gospel. However, neither one of them is significant in comparison to God, who is the one who actually enables people to accept and believe in the gospel. If possible, preserve the farming metaphor, even if you need to adjust some of the details. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])<br><br>### Building metaphor<br><br>In [3:9b–15](../03/09–15.md), Paul speaks of the Corinthians as if they were a house. Paul is the one who laid the house’s foundation, because he was the one who first proclaimed the gospel to them. Other people, whom Paul does not name, build on the foundation. They are the ones who are teaching the Corinthians more, whether what they teach is correct or not. Paul then says that the building will catch on fire, and what each of these builders used to construct the house will become evident. If they built with durable materials, they will be rewarded, but if they built with materials that burn, they will suffer loss, and the builders themselves will barely escape from the fire. In speaking this way, Paul is warning those who teach more about the gospel that God himself will judge whether what they teach is correct or not. If it is incorrect, those teachers will lose everything and barely be saved themselves. If it is correct, God will honor and reward those teachers. If possible, preserve the building metaphor, even if you need to adjust some of the details. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])<br><br>### Temple metaphor<br><br>In [3:16–17](../03/16–17.md), Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were God’s temple. By speaking this way, he identifies the Corinthian believers as a place where God is specially present. Paul then notes that anyone who does anything to harm God’s temple will be punished by God. Since the Corinthians are like God’s temple, God will punish anyone who does anything to harm them, including if anyone tries to divide them up into different groups. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul asks many questions in this chapter ([3:3–5](../03/03–05.md); [16](../03/16.md)). He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Christ is God’s<br><br>In [3:23](../03/23.md), Paul says that “Christ is God’s.” He does not mean that Christ is a person who belongs to God but is not God. Rather, he means that Christ is part of who God is. Christ belongs to the being of God. In your translation, you should try to preserve this meaning. However, if possible, do not make your translation into a statement about the divinity of Christ, since that is not the main point that Paul is trying to make.
291	1CO	3	1	zfdg	grammar-connect-words-phrases	κἀγώ	1		The word translated **And I** is the same word that appears at the beginning of [2:1](../02/01.md). Just as there, Paul uses **And I** here to introduce how his own experience visiting the Corinthians fits into the general pattern he has outlined at the end of chapter 2. Here, however, his experience with the Corinthians is the opposite of what he would have liked. Therefore, the words **And I** introduce a contrast with what he said in [2:16](../02/16.md) about having the mind of Christ. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of **And I**, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that introduces a specific example or a word or phrase that introduces a contrast. Alternate translation: “But I” or “As for me, I” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
292	1CO	3	1	r4iw	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
293	1CO	3	1	jn0q	figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἠδυνήθην λαλῆσαι ὑμῖν ὡς πνευματικοῖς, ἀλλ’ ὡς σαρκίνοις, ὡς νηπίοις ἐν Χριστῷ.	1		If your language would not naturally state the negative before the positive, you could reverse the order of the **not** statement and the **but** statements. Alternate translation: “had to speak to you as to fleshly, as to infants in Christ, not as to spiritual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
294	1CO	3	1	jx17	figs-nominaladj	πνευματικοῖς…σαρκίνοις	1	spiritual people	Paul is using the adjectives **spiritual** and **fleshly** as nouns in order to describe groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate these with noun phrases. Alternate translation: “to spiritual people … to fleshly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
295	1CO	3	1	r5w5	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ὡς σαρκίνοις, ὡς νηπίοις	1	fleshly people	Here Paul leaves out some words that might be required in your language to make a complete thought. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could supply the needed words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “but I spoke to you as to fleshly; I spoke to you as to infants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
296	1CO	3	1	ja6t	figs-metaphor	νηπίοις ἐν Χριστῷ	1	as to little children in Christ	Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were **infants**. He wants the Corinthians to think about how **infants** are immature, lack knowledge, and are unable to understand most things. By calling the Corinthians **infants in Christ**, he means that in their relationship with Jesus, they are immature, have little knowledge, and are unable to understand very much. If your readers would misunderstand why Paul calls the Corinthians **infants**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “to beginners in Christ” or “to those who could understand very little about their faith in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
297	1CO	3	1	m588	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1		Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ** or being united to Christ explains in what area of their lives they were like **infants**. They acted like **infants** in their relationship with Christ. If your readers would misunderstand **in Christ**, you could express the idea by referring to their “faith” in **Christ** or their “relationship” with **Christ**. Alternate translation: “in their faith in Christ” or “in their relationship with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
298	1CO	3	2	vg2v	figs-metaphor	γάλα ὑμᾶς ἐπότισα, οὐ βρῶμα	1	I fed you milk, not solid food	Paul refers to **milk** because it is the food of “infants,” whom Paul already mentioned in [3:1](../03/01.md). The **milk** is the only thing that the “infants” can eat, and Paul thus uses **milk** to refer to the very simplest things that the Corinthians were able to understand about the gospel. “Infants” do not eat **solid food**, because they are not yet able to properly chew or digest it. So, Paul uses **solid food** to refer to the more complex things about the gospel that he could not teach the Corinthians because they were “infants,” that is, people who could not understand such complex teachings. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I taught you the basics, not the full picture” or “I taught you things that are easy to understand, not things that are hard to understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
299	1CO	3	2	fujt	figs-ellipsis	οὐ βρῶμα	1		Here Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If your language needs these words, you could add a phrase such as “to eat.” Alternate translation: “not solid food to eat” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
300	1CO	3	2	d2x5	figs-ellipsis	οὔπω…ἐδύνασθε…οὐδὲ νῦν δύνασθε	1		Here Paul has omitted some words that may be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If your language needs these words, you could add them here, supplying the idea from earlier in the verse. Alternate translation: “you were not yet able to eat solid food … even now, you are not able to eat solid food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
301	1CO	3	2	i3r5	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλ’	1		Here, **Indeed** functions to contrast the time when Paul visited the Corinthians with the time when Paul is writing this letter. He speaks of these two different times to say that the Corinthians could not to eat the **solid food** at either time. If your readers would misunderstand **Indeed**, you could use a word or phrase that contrasts two times or a word that introduces additional information. Alternate translation: “In fact” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
302	1CO	3	3	m712	figs-nominaladj	σαρκικοί	-1	still fleshly	Paul is using the adjective **fleshly** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this adjective with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “fleshly people … fleshly people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
303	1CO	3	3	o618	figs-abstractnouns	ὅπου…ἐν ὑμῖν ζῆλος καὶ ἔρις	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **jealousy** and **strife**, you could express the ideas by using verbs such as “being jealous” and “fighting.” Alternate translation: “where you are jealous and fight with one another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
304	1CO	3	3	s1uy	figs-metonymy	ὅπου	1		Here, **where** often refers to space. However, here Paul uses it to refer to time. Instead of identifying a specific location, it identifies a specific time. If your readers would misunderstand **where**, you could express the idea by using a word that refers to time. Alternate translation: “when there is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
305	1CO	3	3	k5ll	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ σαρκικοί ἐστε καὶ κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖτε?	1	are you not living according to the flesh, and are you not walking by human standards?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information or for agreement or disagreement. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a statement that draws a conclusion from the **jealousy** and the **strife**. Alternate translation: “you are fleshly and walking according to men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
306	1CO	3	3	oz5v	figs-hendiadys	καὶ	2		Here Paul uses **and** to introduce a definition of what **fleshly** means. It means **walking according to men**. If you cannot use **and** to introduce a definition or explanation, you could use another word or phrase that does introduce a definition or explanation. If you use one of the following alternate translations, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “that is, are you not” or “which means” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
307	1CO	3	3	as2u	figs-metaphor	κατὰ ἄνθρωπον περιπατεῖτε	1		Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were **walking**. If **walking** would not be understood as a description of a person’s way of life in your language, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “behaving as men do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
308	1CO	3	3	ljri	figs-idiom	κατὰ ἄνθρωπον	1		Here Paul speaks of behavior that is **according to men**. He uses this phrase to refer to behaviors done by people who think and act in only human ways. These people do not have God’s Spirit, so they “walk” according to the values and goals of this world. If your readers would misunderstand **according to men**, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that refers to things and behaviors valued by people who do not believe. Alternate translation: “according to what mere humans value” or “according to this world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
309	1CO	3	3	y8b4	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπον	1		Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **men**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “humans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
310	1CO	3	4	cidr	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** introduces further evidence for Paul’s argument that the Corinthians are acting in merely humans ways. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could leave **For** untranslated or express the idea using a word or phrase that introduces more evidence or examples. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
311	1CO	3	4	g8zt	writing-pronouns	λέγῃ τις…ἕτερος	1		Here Paul uses the pronouns **one** and **another** to give two examples of some people in the Corinthian church who are saying these kinds of things. He does not mean that only two people are saying these things. He also does not mean that these are the only things that people in the church are saying. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use words that introduce examples of a larger pattern, and you could add a phrase that indicates that the words **I am of Paul** and **I am of of Apollos** are two examples of the kinds of things that they are saying. Alternate translation: “some people among you say things like … other people among you say things like” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
312	1CO	3	4	rmtq	figs-quotations	ἐγὼ…εἰμι Παύλου…ἐγὼ Ἀπολλῶ	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “that he or she is of Paul … that he or she is of Apollos” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
313	1CO	3	4	g68p	figs-possession	ἐγὼ…εἰμι Παύλου…ἐγὼ Ἀπολλῶ	1		Just as in [1:12](../01/12.md), Paul uses the possessive form to indicate that people are claiming to be part of a specific leader’s group. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express this idea with a word such as “belong” or “follow.” Alternate translation: “‘I follow Paul’ … ‘I follow Apollos’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
314	1CO	3	4	zsby	translate-names	Παύλου…Ἀπολλῶ	1		**Paul** and **Apollos** are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
315	1CO	3	4	s96g	figs-rquestion	οὐκ ἄνθρωποί ἐστε?	1	are you not living as human beings?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information or for agreement or disagreement. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a statement that draws a conclusion from what Paul says the Corinthians are saying. Alternate translation: “you are men” or “this shows that you are men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
316	1CO	3	4	mmlq	figs-explicit	ἄνθρωποί	1		When Paul says that the Corinthians are **men**, he means that they are “only” or “merely” **men**. He is not identifying them as humans. Rather, he means that they are acting and speaking from “merely human” perspective rather than from God’s perspective, a perspective they can share if they have God’s Spirit. If your readers would misunderstand **men**, you could add a word or phrase that clarifies that **men** refers to a “merely human” view of the world. Alternate translation: “merely men” or “speaking from a human perspective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
317	1CO	3	4	te5r	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωποί	1		Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **men**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “humans” or “men and women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
318	1CO	3	5	typo	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὖν	1		Here, **then** introduces a further stage in Paul’s argument. He has argued in [3:3](../03/04.md) that **Paul** and **Apollos** should not be treated as leaders of groups. In this verse, he goes on to explain how he thinks that **Paul** and **Apollos** should be treated, which is as servants of Christ. Thus, the word translated **then** introduces who **Paul** and **Apollos** really are. If your readers would misunderstand how **then** functions, you could leave it untranslated or use a word that introduces the next step in an argument. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “therefore,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
319	1CO	3	5	m463	figs-rquestion	τί οὖν ἐστιν Ἀπολλῶς? τί δέ ἐστιν Παῦλος? διάκονοι	1	Who then is Apollos? And who is Paul?	Here Paul uses these questions to do two things. First, the questions imply that **Apollos** and **Paul** are not very important. Therefore, an implied answer to these questions would be that **Apollos** and **Paul** are “not very much.” Second, Paul uses the questions to introduce his own answer to these questions. After using the questions to imply that he and **Apollos** are not much, he then states that they are **servants**. If your readers would misunderstand these questions, you could express them as a statement about the status of **Apollos** and **Paul** as **servants**, and you could use a word such as “only” or “merely” to express the idea that they are not very important. Alternate translation: “Apollos and Paul are merely servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
320	1CO	3	5	i9d0	translate-names	Ἀπολλῶς…Παῦλος	1		**Apollos** and **Paul** are the names of two men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
321	1CO	3	5	lq6n	figs-123person	ἐστιν Παῦλος?	1	And who is Paul?	In this verse, **Paul** speaks of himself in the third person. This could sound like he is speaking about a different **Paul** than himself. If your readers would misunderstand this use of **Paul**, you could clarify that **Paul** is naming himself. Alternate translation: “am I, Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
322	1CO	3	5	qmy2	figs-ellipsis	διάκονοι δι’ ὧν ἐπιστεύσατε	1	Servants through whom you believed	Here Paul omits several words that may be required in your language to make a complete thought. If your language needs these words, you could include words such as “we are” or “they are.” Alternate translation: “We are servants through whom you believed” or “They are servants through whom you believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
323	1CO	3	5	edod	figs-explicit	διάκονοι δι’ ὧν ἐπιστεύσατε	1		When **Paul** says that he and **Apollos** are those **through whom** the Corinthians **believed**, he is implying that the Corinthians believed in someone other than **Paul** and **Apollos**. That is, they believed in Christ. If your readers would not make this inference about **whom** the Corinthians **believed** in, you could make it explicit by including what the Corinthians **believed** in, which is “Christ” and not **Apollos** or **Paul**. Alternate translation: “Servants through whom you believed in Christ” or “Servants through whom you believed in Christ, not in us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
324	1CO	3	5	h2jv	grammar-connect-words-phrases	καὶ…ὡς	1		Here, the words translated **even as** introduce the way in which **Apollos** and **Paul** act as **servants**. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could use a word or phrase that would introduce the ways in which **Apollos** and **Paul** are servants. Alternate translation: “who do what” or “serving just as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
325	1CO	3	5	f6wm	figs-ellipsis	καὶ ἑκάστῳ ὡς ὁ Κύριος ἔδωκεν	1	Servants through whom you believed, to each of whom the Lord gave tasks	Here Paul omits what **the Lord gave** because it would be clear that he means that **the Lord gave** a specific job or task **to each one** of them. If your readers would misunderstand **the Lord gave to each one**, you could add a word or phrase that indicates that **the Lord gave** a specific job or task. Alternate translation: “even as the Lord gave a task to teach one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
326	1CO	3	5	e8tb	writing-pronouns	ἑκάστῳ	1		Here, **to each one** directly refers back to **Apollos** and **Paul**. However, it also probably refers to everyone who serves the Lord. If you can refer to multiple individuals considered separately in your language, you could use that form here. Alternate translation: “to each and every one who serves him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
327	1CO	3	6	iah7	figs-exmetaphor	ἐγὼ ἐφύτευσα, Ἀπολλῶς ἐπότισεν, ἀλλὰ ὁ Θεὸς ηὔξανεν.	1	I planted	Paul speaks about the roles that God gave to him and to **Apollos** as if they were farmers who **planted** and **watered** their crops. The one who “plants” is the person who begins the farming process, just like Paul first introduced the Corinthians to the gospel. The one who “waters” is the person who continues the farming process by making sure the plants receive what they need to grow, just like **Apollos** continued to proclaim the gospel to the Corinthians. It was well-known in Paul’s culture that plants grow because God enables them to do so, just like God enabled to the Corinthians to receive the gospel and learn more about God. If your readers would misunderstand the way that Paul uses farming language to describe how the Corinthians received the gospel, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I introduced you to the gospel, Apollos taught you more about the gospel, but God enabled you to believe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
328	1CO	3	6	ic6x	figs-ellipsis	ἐγὼ ἐφύτευσα, Ἀπολλῶς ἐπότισεν, ἀλλὰ ὁ Θεὸς ηὔξανεν.	1		Paul never states what it is that he **planted**, that **Apollos watered**, and that **God caused to grow**. He does not state what it is because he wishes to use a general statement about farming practices. If you need to state what is **planted** and **watered**, you could include a general word or words such as “seed,” “plant,” or “crop.” Alternate translation: “I planted the seeds, Apollos watered the plants, but God caused the crop to grow” or “I planted the crop, Apollos watered it, but God caused it to grow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
329	1CO	3	6	gyi5	translate-names	Ἀπολλῶς	1	Apollos watered	**Apollos** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
330	1CO	3	6	iq9n	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἐφύτευσα, Ἀπολλῶς ἐπότισεν, ἀλλὰ ὁ Θεὸς	1	but God gave the growth	Here Paul uses **but** to contrast himself and **Apollos** with **God**. The point is that what he did and what **Apollos** did are at the same level of importance, but God’s work is the most important. Another way to understand this contrast is to notice that Paul and **Apollos** assist in the process of plants growing, but **God** is the only one who actually makes them grow. Again, the main point is that Paul and **Apollos** are simply “servants” of God ([3:5](../03/05.md)) in a process that God oversees. If your readers would misunderstand **but**, you could use a word or phrase that puts Paul and **Apollos** together in contrast with **God**. Alternate translation: “planted, and Apollos watered. However, it was God who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
331	1CO	3	7	g78n	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὥστε	1		Here, **so then** introduces a conclusion or inference from what Paul has said about watering, planting, and growth in [3:6](../03/06.md). He wishes to explain that the difference between **God**. who **causes the growth**. and anyone who **plants** or **waters** relates to their importance in the process. It is **God** who is important, because he is the only one who **causes the growth**, just as Paul stated in [3:6](../03/06.md). If your readers would misunderstand **so then**, you could use a comparable word or phrase that introduces a conclusion or an inference. Alternate translation: “Therefore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
332	1CO	3	7	c4wy	figs-exmetaphor	οὔτε ὁ φυτεύων ἐστίν τι, οὔτε ὁ ποτίζων, ἀλλ’ ὁ αὐξάνων, Θεός.	1		Paul now speaks in general about the tasks that God has given to those who proclaim the gospel. He continues to speak as if those who proclaim the gospel were farmers who planted and watered their crops. The **one who plants** is the person who begins the farming process, just like the person who first proclaims the gospel. The **one who waters** is the person who continues the farming process by making sure the plants receive what they need to grow, just like the person who continues to teach the gospel. It is well-known in Paul’s culture that plants grow because God enables them to do so, just like God enables those who believe to receive the gospel and learn more about God. If your readers would misunderstand the way that Paul uses farming language to describe how people proclaim the gospel and how God enables others to receive it, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “neither the person who introduces believers to the gospel nor the person who teaches believers more about the gospel is anything, but God {is} the one who enables believers to have faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
333	1CO	3	7	dl3z	figs-genericnoun	ὁ φυτεύων…ὁ ποτίζων	1	neither he who plants is anything … but God is the one who causes the growth	When Paul speaks of **the one who plants**, he has himself in mind. When he speaks of **the one who waters**, he has Apollos in mind. This is clear from what he says in the last verse ([3:6](../03/06.md)). However, he is now speaking in more general terms. He does not mean just **one** person who does “planting” and one person who does “watering.” Rather, he wishes to refer to anyone who does either of these tasks. If the phrase **the one who** would not be understood to mean that in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person who does the task. Alternate translation: “any person who plants … any person who waters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
334	1CO	3	7	uutk	figs-ellipsis	ὁ φυτεύων…ὁ ποτίζων	1		Paul never states what it is that someone **plants** and what someone else **waters**. He does not state what it is because he wishes to use a general statement about farming practices. If you need to state what is planted and watered, you could include a general word or words such as “seed,” “plant,” or “crop.” Alternate translation: “the one who plants the seeds … the one who waters the plants” or “the one who plants the crop … the one who waters it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
335	1CO	3	7	jrb1	figs-hyperbole	τι	1		Here, **anything** is an exaggeration the Corinthians would have understood as emphasis on how unimportant the people who plant and water are. It is as if they were nothing, as if they did not exist. Paul does not mean that they do not exist. Instead, he uses this exaggeration to show how unimportant the people who plant and water are compared to God. If your readers would misunderstand **anything**, you could use a word or phrase that indicates “importance.” Alternate translation: “important” or “significant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
336	1CO	3	7	hmk6	figs-ellipsis	ἀλλ’ ὁ αὐξάνων, Θεός.	1		Here Paul does not directly finish the contrast between the people who plant and water and **God**. What he means is that **God** is the one who is important, because he **causes the growth**. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this contrast, you could supply the words that Paul omits, including a word or phrase about how God is “important.” Alternate translation: “but God, who is the one who causes the growth, is the important one” or “but God is the significant one because he causes the growth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
337	1CO	3	7	c68g	figs-abstractnouns	αὐξάνων	1	but God is the one who causes the growth	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **growth**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “grow.” Alternate translation: “who makes it grow” or “who causes things to grow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
338	1CO	3	8	dmfs	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, **Now** introduces the next step in Paul’s argument. If your readers would misunderstand **Now**, you could leave it untranslated or use a word or phrase that introduces the next step in an argument. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
339	1CO	3	8	s16b	figs-exmetaphor	ὁ φυτεύων…καὶ ὁ ποτίζων, ἕν εἰσιν; ἕκαστος δὲ τὸν ἴδιον μισθὸν λήμψεται, κατὰ τὸν ἴδιον κόπον.	1	he who plants and he who waters are one	Here Paul continues to speak as if those who proclaim the gospel were farmers who planted and watered their crops. The **one who plants** is the person who begins the farming process, just like the person who first proclaims the gospel. The **one who waters** is the person who continues the farming process by making sure the plants receive what they need to grow, just like the person who continues to teach the gospel. The **one who plants** and the **one who waters** will receive **wages** that match the kind of **labor** they did. In the same way, those who first proclaim the gospel and those who teach more about the gospel will receive rewards from God that match the task they accomplished. If your readers would misunderstand the way that Paul uses farming language to describe how people proclaim the gospel and how God rewards those who do so, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the person who introduces believers to the gospel and the person who teaches believers more about the gospel are one, and each will receive his own reward from God according to his own task” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
340	1CO	3	8	ydx8	figs-genericnoun	ὁ φυτεύων…ὁ ποτίζων	1		Just as in [3:7](../03/07.md), when Paul speaks of **the one who plants**, he has himself in mind. When he speaks of **the one who waters**, he has Apollos in mind. This is clear from what he says in [3:6](../03/06.md). However, he is now speaking in more general terms. He does not mean just **one** person who does “planting” and one person who does “watering.” Rather, he wishes to refer to anyone who does either of these tasks. If the phrase **the one who** would not be understood to mean that in your language, you could use a word or phrase that refers to any person who does the task. Alternate translation: “any person who plants … any person who waters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
341	1CO	3	8	fsj6	figs-ellipsis	ὁ φυτεύων…ὁ ποτίζων	1		Paul never states what it is that someone **plants** and that someone else **waters**. He does not state what it is because he wishes to use a general statement about farming practices. If you need to state what is planted and watered, you could include a general word or words such as “seed,” “plant,” or “crop.” Alternate translation: “the one who plants the seeds … the one who waters the plants” or “the one who plants the crop … the one who waters it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
342	1CO	3	8	za43	figs-metaphor	ἕν εἰσιν	1	are one	Paul here speaks as if the **one who plants** and the **one who waters** are the same person. He speaks in this way in order to: (1) show that the **one who plants** and the **one who waters** do the same kind of work with the same goal in mind. Alternate translation: “share a common goal” or “do the same kind of work” (2) state that the **one who plants** and the **one who waters** have equal status. Alternate translation: “are of equal importance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
343	1CO	3	8	dfhn	figs-gendernotations	τὸν ἴδιον	-1		Here, the words translated **his** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If your readers would misunderstand **his**, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “his or her own … his or her own” or “that person’s own … that person’s own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
344	1CO	3	9	vphl	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1		Here, **For** introduces a summary statement that concludes the whole section in which Paul compares those who proclaim the gospel to farmers ([3:5–8](../03/05–08.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that introduces a summary statement. Alternate translation: “Thus,” or “In the end,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
345	1CO	3	9	gj26	figs-exclusive	ἐσμεν	1	we are brutally beaten	Here, **we** refers to Paul, Apollos, and others who proclaim the gospel; **we** does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
346	1CO	3	9	r9sn	figs-possession	Θεοῦ…συνεργοί	1	God’s fellow workers	Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe: (1) **fellow workers** who work for **God**. Alternate translation: “coworkers under God’s leadership” (2) **workers** who join **God** in God’s work. Alternate translation: “people who work with God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
347	1CO	3	9	iaan	figs-infostructure	Θεοῦ γεώργιον, Θεοῦ οἰκοδομή ἐστε.	1		Here Paul switches from a metaphor about farming to a metaphor about building. He makes this switch without using any connecting words, and he makes the switch within one sentence. Consider whether your language would include the introduction of a new topic at the end of the previous section or at the beginning of a new section, and put **God’s building** where it would be understood as introducing a new section. Include **you are** again if it would be necessary. Additionally, if your language would not begin a new section without using a connecting word or phrase, you could use such a word or phrase here. Alternate translation: “you are God’s field. In fact, you are also God’s building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
348	1CO	3	9	lqg1	figs-metaphor	Θεοῦ γεώργιον	1	God’s garden	Here Paul concludes the farming metaphor he began in [3:6](../03/06.md). He identifies the Corinthians as a **field** that is owned by **God**. It is in this field that those who proclaim the gospel “plant” and “water” the crop. By calling the Corinthians a **God’s field**, Paul means to say that they belong to God and that they are the people among whom those who proclaim the gospel labor. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “people who belong to God and among whom we work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
349	1CO	3	9	l2fq	figs-exmetaphor	Θεοῦ οἰκοδομή	1	God’s building	Here Paul introduces a new metaphor that compares the Corinthians to a building. This building belongs to God, and those who proclaim the gospel, including Paul, help to construct the building. He uses this metaphor and variations of it in [3:9–17](../03/09–17.md). Here, he calls the Corinthians **God’s building**, by which he means basically the same thing as when he calls them **God’s field**. They belong to God, and he and others who proclaim the gospel work among them. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this metaphor, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “people who belong to God and among whom we work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
350	1CO	3	10	iln9	figs-activepassive	τοῦ Θεοῦ τὴν δοθεῖσάν μοι	1	According to the grace of God that was given to me	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **grace** that **was given** rather than on the person doing the “giving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “that God gave me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
351	1CO	3	10	a69q	figs-exmetaphor	ὡς σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων θεμέλιον ἔθηκα, ἄλλος δὲ ἐποικοδομεῖ. ἕκαστος δὲ βλεπέτω, πῶς ἐποικοδομεῖ.	1	I laid a foundation	Paul began using the metaphor of a house in [3:9](../03/09.md). Here he continues that metaphor by speaking about himself as a **wise master builder** who lays **a foundation**. By speaking in this way, he means that he is the one who first introduced the Corinthian believers to the gospel, just like a **master builder** first lays **a foundation**. He then speaks of people who build **on** that foundation, meaning that others who proclaim more about the gospel can only do this by using and continuing from the good news that Paul already proclaimed. If your readers would misunderstand this extended metaphor, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “as a wise church planter, I first proclaimed the gospel to you, and another is teaching you more about that gospel, but let each one be careful how he teaches you more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
352	1CO	3	10	nw8f	figs-infostructure	ὡς σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων θεμέλιον ἔθηκα	1		The phrase **as a wise master builder** could describe: (1) the way in which Paul **laid a foundation**. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “I laid a foundation as a wise master builder” (2) the specific **grace** that God gave to Paul. Alternate translation: “to be a wise master builder, I laid a foundation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
353	1CO	3	10	mpxl	translate-unknown	σοφὸς ἀρχιτέκτων	1		Here, **master builder** refers to the person who is in charge of an entire construction project, including designing it and making sure that the building is constructed according to the design. If your readers would misunderstand **master builder**, you could use a comparable word or phrase. Alternate translation: “a wise architect” or “a wise construction manager” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
354	1CO	3	10	mqb8	writing-pronouns	ἄλλος…ἐποικοδομεῖ	1		Here, **another** refers to anyone who **is building on** the foundation, including Apollos. However, Paul does not mean to identify one specific person who **is building**. If your readers would not infer that **another** refers to any builder, you could use a word or phrase that identifies any person who does a specific task. Alternate translation: “other people are building on it” or “someone else is building on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
355	1CO	3	10	pwi7	figs-imperative	ἕκαστος…βλεπέτω	1	another is building on it	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “each one should be careful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
356	1CO	3	10	px9c	writing-pronouns	ἕκαστος	1	each man	Here, **each one** refers to any person who **builds** on the **foundation**. If your readers would misunderstand **each one**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies any person who falls into a certain category. Alternate translation: “every person who builds on it” or “each builder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
357	1CO	3	10	krd6	writing-pronouns	ἐποικοδομεῖ	2		Here, **he** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If your readers would misunderstand **he**, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “he or she builds on it” or “each one builds on it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
358	1CO	3	11	m4j2	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, **for** introduces the reason why the people who build on the foundation should “be careful how” they build “on it” ([3:10](../03/10.md)). They need to “be careful” because what they build must match the only **foundation** that exists, which is **Jesus Christ**. If **for** would not indicate this connection in your language, you could express the idea with a word that gives a reason or basis for a command. Alternate translation: “because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
359	1CO	3	11	qd1o	figs-exmetaphor	θεμέλιον…ἄλλον οὐδεὶς δύναται θεῖναι, παρὰ τὸν κείμενον, ὅς ἐστιν Ἰησοῦς Χριστός.	1		Paul continues the metaphor about houses, again speaking about a **foundation**. Here, he reminds the Corinthians that each house has only one **foundation**, and once that **foundation** has been **laid**, no one lays another **foundation** for the house. He speaks in this way to remind them that only one person can introduce them to the gospel, and anyone who tries to introduce them to another gospel is building a different house, not the same house. Paul then directly states that the **foundation** refers to the message about **Jesus Christ** that he preached to them and which should be the starting point and basis for everything else they learn about the gospel. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this metaphor, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “no one can first proclaim a gospel to you other than the one that I already proclaimed to you, which is Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
360	1CO	3	11	jt2b	figs-activepassive	τὸν κείμενον	1	no one can lay a foundation other than the one that has been laid	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **has been laid** rather than on the person doing the “laying.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that he himself does it. Alternate translation: “the one that I already laid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
361	1CO	3	11	yh1f		ὅς ἐστιν Ἰησοῦς Χριστός.	1		If you use the second alternate translation, you may need to change the comma to a period before it. Alternate translation: “which is Jesus Christ” or “That foundation is Jesus Christ”
362	1CO	3	11	azm0	figs-metonymy	Ἰησοῦς Χριστός	1		Here Paul uses the words translated **Jesus Christ** to refer to the message he proclaimed to them about **Jesus Christ**. If your readers would misunderstand **Jesus Christ**, you could include a word or phrase that refers to Paul’s message about **Jesus Christ**. Alternate translation: “the good news about Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
363	1CO	3	12	nuza	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1		Here, **Now** introduces the next step in Paul’s argument. If your readers would misunderstand **Now**, you could leave it untranslated or use a word or phrase that introduces the next step in an argument. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
364	1CO	3	12	nbu2	figs-exmetaphor	εἰ…τις ἐποικοδομεῖ ἐπὶ τὸν θεμέλιον χρυσόν, ἄργυρον, λίθους τιμίους, ξύλα, χόρτον, καλάμην	1	Now if anyone builds on the foundation with gold, silver, precious stones, wood, hay, or straw	Here Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. He compares those who teach about the gospel with builders who construct a house on its foundation. These builders can use a variety of different materials to construct the house, and Paul lists six. The first three, **gold, silver, precious stones**, are more durable, while the last three, **wood, hay, straw**, are less durable. It is clear that Paul is interested in durability, because of the next verse, where he states that all of these materials will be tested with fire ([3:13](../03/13.md)). By speaking this way, he indicates that those who proclaim more about the gospel can teach things that are more or less true and acceptable to God. If your readers would misunderstand this metaphor, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “if anyone teaches you more about the gospel with words that are acceptable to God or words that are not acceptable to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
365	1CO	3	12	f8oa	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ…τις ἐποικοδομεῖ ἐπὶ τὸν θεμέλιον	1		Here Paul uses a conditional **if**, but he does not think that this is a hypothetical situation or something that is likely not true. Instead, Paul thinks that people are “building” on the foundation, and he wants to talk about how they are doing so. Additionally, the “then” part of the **if** statement does not begin until the next verse. If your readers would misunderstand this form and structure, you could rephrase the condition into a circumstance or an assumption. Alternate translation: “whenever people build on the foundation, using” or “when anyone builds on the foundation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
366	1CO	3	12	tzgf	translate-unknown	χρυσόν, ἄργυρον, λίθους τιμίους, ξύλα, χόρτον, καλάμην,	1		These six things are all materials that could be used in constructing buildings. The first three will survive if the building catches on fire, but the last three will not (for the fire, see [3:13–15](../03/13–15.md)). In your culture, you may not use all of these materials for constructing buildings. In that case, you could include just some of these materials or include materials that you do use for constructing buildings in your culture, making sure to include some materials will not burn up and others that will burn up. Alternate translation: “steel, concrete, lumber, or cloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
367	1CO	3	13	ndu3	figs-exmetaphor	ἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον φανερὸν γενήσεται; ἡ γὰρ ἡμέρα δηλώσει, ὅτι ἐν πυρὶ ἀποκαλύπτεται; καὶ ἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον, ὁποῖόν ἐστιν, τὸ πῦρ αὐτὸ δοκιμάσει	1	For it will be revealed in fire. The fire will test the quality of what each one had done	Here Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. He speaks as if **the day** of God’s judgment is like a fire that **will test** the building and show what kind of building materials the builders used. Paul speaks in this way to illustrate how God’s judgment will reveal whether what those who proclaim more about the gospel teach is pleasing to him or not. If your readers would misunderstand this metaphor, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the work of each one will become evident, for opening night will display it; for opening night always draws critics, and the critics will test of what value is the work of each one” or “the truth of what each one has taught you will become evident, for God will show how true it is when he comes to judge everyone; when he comes, he will judge everyone, and his judgment will reveal whether what each person has taught is true or not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
368	1CO	3	13	wv4h	figs-synecdoche	ἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον	1		Here, **work** refers to the product or result of the **work**, not the action of “working.” If your readers would misunderstand **work**, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to the product of the **work**. Alternate translation: “what each one has made” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
369	1CO	3	13	t2mk	figs-activepassive	ἑκάστου τὸ ἔργον φανερὸν γενήσεται	1	his work will be revealed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **work** that is **revealed** rather than the person doing the “revealing.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God will reveal the work of each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
370	1CO	3	13	mv14	figs-explicit	ἡ…ἡμέρα δηλώσει	1	for the daylight will reveal it	Here Paul uses **day** in the same way the Old Testament uses it: to refer to an event in which God saves his people and punishes his enemies. Paul specifically refers to the event in which Jesus returns to judge everyone. If your readers would misunderstand **day**, you could include more words that clarify what Paul means by **day**. Alternate translation: “the day of Christ’s return will display” or “when Christ returns, he will display it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
371	1CO	3	13	lyny	figs-activepassive	ἐν πυρὶ ἀποκαλύπτεται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what is **revealed** rather than the person doing the “revealing.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God reveals it in fire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
372	1CO	3	13	x48s	writing-pronouns	ἀποκαλύπτεται	1		Here, **it is revealed** refers to **the day**. It does not refer to the **work**. If your readers would misunderstand what **it** refers to, you clarify that **it** refers to **the day**. Alternate translation: “that day is revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
373	1CO	3	13	ozx6	figs-pastforfuture	ἀποκαλύπτεται	1		Here Paul speaks as if the day **is revealed** right now. In his language, he can use the present tense to speak about the way in which something happens in general, even if it is not happening in the present moment. If your readers would misunderstand this use of the present tense, you could express the idea by using the future tense. Alternate translation: “it will be revealed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
374	1CO	3	13	rgfy		ἐν πυρὶ	1		Alternate translation: “with fire” or “in a fiery way”
375	1CO	3	13	wo2j	figs-rpronouns	τὸ πῦρ αὐτὸ	1		Here, **itself** focuses attention on **the fire**. If **itself** would not draw attention in this way in your language, you could express the attention or focus in another way. Alternate translation: “that fire” or “the fire indeed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
376	1CO	3	14	wexj	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον μενεῖ, ὃ ἐποικοδόμησεν, μισθὸν λήμψεται.	1		Here and in [3:15](../03/15.md), Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person’s **work** might remain, or it might not. He then specifies the result for each possibility. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “Anyone whose work that he built will remain will receive a reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
377	1CO	3	14	ygva	figs-exmetaphor	εἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον μενεῖ, ὃ ἐποικοδόμησεν, μισθὸν λήμψεται.	1		Here Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. In this verse, he notes that builders whose structures survive a fire receive rewards. He speaks in this way to indicate that God will reward those who proclaim more about the gospel if God finds their teachings to be accurate and acceptable to him when he judges everyone. The **reward** includes public recognition and other blessings. If your readers would misunderstand this metaphor, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “If anyone teaches you more about the gospel with words that are acceptable to God, he will be honored by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
378	1CO	3	14	iddt	figs-doublet	τινος τὸ ἔργον…ὃ ἐποικοδόμησεν	1		Here Paul speaks both of **work** and what **he built**. If your readers would misunderstand why Paul uses both of these terms, you could combine the ideas into one expression. Alternate translation: “anyone’s building project” or “what anyone built” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
379	1CO	3	14	s4u3	figs-synecdoche	τὸ ἔργον	1	work remains	Here Paul uses **work** to refer to the product or result of the **work**, not the action of “working.” If your readers would misunderstand **work**, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to the product of the **work**. Alternate translation: “project” or “house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
380	1CO	3	14	tec9		μενεῖ	1		Alternate translation: “does not burn up”
381	1CO	3	14	ge6s	figs-gendernotations	τινος…ἐποικοδόμησεν…λήμψεται	1		Here, **he** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If your readers would misunderstand **he**, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “anyone’s … he or she built … he or she will receive” or “people’s … they built … they will receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
382	1CO	3	15	vax6	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον κατακαήσεται, ζημιωθήσεται	1		Here, just as in [3:14](../03/14.md), Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person’s work might remain, or it might not. He then specifies the result for each possibility. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “Anyone whose work will be burned up will suffer loss” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
383	1CO	3	15	ysjz	figs-exmetaphor	εἴ τινος τὸ ἔργον κατακαήσεται, ζημιωθήσεται; αὐτὸς δὲ σωθήσεται, οὕτως δὲ ὡς διὰ πυρός.	1		Here Paul continues the metaphor about building a house. In this verse, he notes that builders whose structures do not survive a fire **suffer loss**. The builders themselves do not die, but they are in trouble, almost as if they were in the building and barely escaped as it burned to the ground. Paul speaks in this way to indicate that God will not reward those who proclaim more about the gospel if God finds their teachings to be inaccurate and unacceptable to him when he judges everyone. The **loss** includes lack of honor and rewards from God. However, those who proclaim more about God in inaccurate and unacceptable ways are not condemned to punishment by God. Instead, just like someone escaping from a burning building, they are just barely accepted by God. If your readers would misunderstand this metaphor, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “If anyone teaches you more about the gospel with words that are not acceptable to God, he will receive no honor or blessing when God judges everyone, but he himself will be accepted by God, although just barely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
384	1CO	3	15	c2xj	figs-activepassive	τινος τὸ ἔργον κατακαήσεται	1	if anyone’s work is burned up	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **work** that is **burned up** rather than on what does the “burning up.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the **fire** does it. Alternate translation: “fire burns up anyone’s work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
385	1CO	3	15	fyfr	figs-synecdoche	τὸ ἔργον	1		Here Paul uses **work** to refer to the product or result of the **work**, not the action of “working.” If your readers would misunderstand **work**, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to the product of the **work**. Alternate translation: “project” or “house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
386	1CO	3	15	b2l8	figs-gendernotations	τινος…ζημιωθήσεται…αὐτὸς…σωθήσεται	1		Here, the words translated **he** and **himself** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter which their gender might be. If your readers would misunderstand **he** and **himself**, you could express the idea by using words that do not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “anyone’s … he or she will suffer loss … he himself or she herself will be saved” or “people’s … they will suffer loss … they themselves will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
387	1CO	3	15	ups4	translate-unknown	ζημιωθήσεται	1	he will suffer loss	The phrase **he will suffer loss** expresses the opposite of “receiving a reward.” Instead of gaining honor and money, the person loses honor and money. If your readers would misunderstand **he will suffer loss**, you could express the idea by using a phrase that refers to losing honor and money. Alternate translation: “he will lose honor and money” or “he will be deprived of any reward” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
388	1CO	3	15	w1zv	figs-activepassive	αὐτὸς δὲ σωθήσεται	1	but he himself will be saved	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **he** who will **be saved** rather than the person doing the “saving.” You could express the idea with **he** saving **himself** or **he** not perishing. Alternate translation: “but he will not perish” or “but he will save himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
389	1CO	3	15	vdvl	figs-rpronouns	αὐτὸς…σωθήσεται	1	but he himself will be saved	Here, **himself** focuses attention on **he**. If **himself** would not draw attention in this way in your language, you could express the attention or focus in another way. Alternate translation: “he will be saved” or “he indeed will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
390	1CO	3	16	uq2g	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐστε, καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ οἰκεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν?	1	Do you not know that you are God’s temple and that the Spirit of God lives in you?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information or for agreement or disagreement. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing by reminding them of something that they should already know. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “you know that you are a temple of God, and you know that the Spirit of God lives in you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
391	1CO	3	16	yc1g	figs-exmetaphor	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ναὸς Θεοῦ ἐστε, καὶ τὸ Πνεῦμα τοῦ Θεοῦ οἰκεῖ ἐν ὑμῖν?	1		Here Paul develops the metaphor about constructing a building in new ways. First, he says that the Corinthians together are **a temple of God**, which is a specific type of building. The **temple of God** was the place where God was present in a special way. Paul is thus identifying the Corinthians as people among whom God is present in the same kind of special way. Second, he says that the Corinthians together are the house or city in which the **Spirit of God lives**. The house or city in which someone lives is where they are always present. Paul is thus saying that the Holy Spirit is always present with the Corinthians. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of Paul’s metaphors, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea in non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “Do you not know that you are the sacred shrine where God dwells, and you are the country in which the Spirit of God has residency?” or “Do you not know that God is present among you, and the Spirit of God is always with you?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
392	1CO	3	17	pc0d	figs-exmetaphor	εἴ τις τὸν ναὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ φθείρει, φθερεῖ τοῦτον ὁ Θεός; ὁ γὰρ ναὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ ἅγιός ἐστιν, οἵτινές ἐστε ὑμεῖς.	1		Here Paul finishes the metaphor about the temple that he began in [3:16](../03/16.md). He notes that, because God’s temple is **holy**, God will **destroy** anyone who **destroys** the temple. He then again repeats that the Corinthians **are** the temple. By speaking in this way, Paul wishes to remind everyone among the Corinthian believers that “destroying” the unity of the believers is like “destroying” the **temple**, and God will act in response to this like he would if someone “destroyed” his **temple**. If your readers would misunderstand this metaphor, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “If anyone desecrates God’s sacred shrine, God will punish that person. For the sacred shrine is holy, and you are God’s sacred shrine” or “If anyone divides the place of God’s presence, God will punish that person. For wherever God’s presence can be found is holy, and you are the place where God’s presence can be found” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
393	1CO	3	17	pv8w	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ τις τὸν ναὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ φθείρει, φθερεῖ τοῦτον ὁ Θεός	1		Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person might destroy God’s temple, or that person might not. He then specifies the consequence if someone does destroy God’s temple. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “God will destroy anyone who destroys the temple of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
394	1CO	3	17	vcuv	writing-pronouns	οἵτινές ἐστε ὑμεῖς	1		Here, **which** could refer to: (1) **the temple of God**. Alternate translation: “which temple you are” (2) **holy**. Alternate translation: “and you too are holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
395	1CO	3	18	glg8	figs-imperative	μηδεὶς ἑαυτὸν ἐξαπατάτω…μωρὸς γενέσθω	1	Let no one deceive himself	In this verse, Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “No one should deceive himself … he should become a ‘fool’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
396	1CO	3	18	s57s	figs-gendernotations	μηδεὶς ἑαυτὸν ἐξαπατάτω; εἴ τις δοκεῖ σοφὸς εἶναι ἐν ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ, μωρὸς γενέσθω, ἵνα γένηται σοφός.	1		Here, the words translated **himself**, **he**, and **him** are written in masculine form, but they refer to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If your readers would misunderstand **himself**, **he**, and **him**, you could express the idea by using words that do not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “Let no one deceive himself or herself. If anyone among you thinks he or she is wise in this age, let him or her become a ‘fool,’ that he or she may become wise” or “Let no people deceive themselves. If any people among you think they are wise in this age, let them become ‘fools,’ that they may become wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
397	1CO	3	18	p3wi	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ τις δοκεῖ σοφὸς εἶναι ἐν ὑμῖν ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ, μωρὸς γενέσθω	1	in this age	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a person might think that **he is wise**, or that person might not think this. He then specifies the consequence if someone does think that **he is wise**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “Let whoever among you thinks he is wise in this age become a ‘fool’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
398	1CO	3	18	p53y		ἐν τῷ αἰῶνι τούτῳ	1		Alternate translation: “according to the standards of this age”
399	1CO	3	18	s7xi	figs-irony	μωρὸς γενέσθω, ἵνα γένηται σοφός	1	let him become a “fool”	Here Paul commands any **wise** person among the Corinthians to become a **fool**. He does not actually think that doing what he commands makes a person a **fool**, which is why **fool** appears in quotation marks. Rather, he knows that many will call doing what he commands “becoming a **fool**.” To make this clearer, he then says that becoming what many will call **a “fool”** will actually lead to becoming truly **wise**. If your readers would misunderstand Paul’s use of the word **fool**, you could use a form in your language that indicates that Paul is speaking from the perspective of other people. Alternate translation: “let him become a so-called ‘fool,’ that he may become truly wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
400	1CO	3	18	pvt3	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		Here, **that** introduces the goal or purpose for which a person should **become a “fool”**. If your readers would misunderstand **that**, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that introduces a goal or purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
401	1CO	3	19	m0gd	figs-possession	ἡ…σοφία τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe what **this world** considers to be **wisdom**. If **the wisdom of this world** would not be understood in your language as **wisdom** from the perspective of **this world**, you could use a different form that makes this meaning clear. Alternate translation: “what this world considers to be wisdom” or “worldly wisdom” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
402	1CO	3	19	uqb3	figs-idiom	παρὰ τῷ Θεῷ	1		Here Paul uses the phrase **with God** to identify God’s perspective. If your readers would misunderstand **with God**, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that identifies that this is **foolishness** according to how God views the world. Alternate translation: “from God’s perspective” or “in God’s eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
403	1CO	3	19	ayvv	writing-quotations	γέγραπται γάρ	1		In Paul’s culture, **For it is written** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Job” (see [Job 5:13](../../job/05/13.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it can be read in the Old Testament” or “For the book of Job says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
404	1CO	3	19	vpod	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you could express it so that: (1) the scripture or scripture author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “the author of Job has written” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
405	1CO	3	19	zws3	figs-quotations	γέγραπται…ὁ δρασσόμενος τοὺς σοφοὺς ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτῶν	1	He catches the wise in their craftiness	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “it is written that God catches the wise in their craftiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
406	1CO	3	19	wxz2	figs-metaphor	δρασσόμενος τοὺς σοφοὺς ἐν τῇ πανουργίᾳ αὐτῶν	1		Here Paul speaks as if God reaches out and grabs **the wise** as they act in **craftiness**. By speaking in this way, he means that even “crafty” or clever people cannot avoid God when he wishes to “catch” them. God is not deceived, and he can disrupt their clever plans. If your readers would misunderstand **catches**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “interrupts the clever plans of the wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
407	1CO	3	19	j0ga	figs-nominaladj	τοὺς σοφοὺς	1		Paul is using the adjective **wise** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this adjective with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “wise people” or “those who are wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
408	1CO	3	19	x6ts	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πανουργίᾳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **craftiness**, you could express the idea by using by using a phrase such as “crafty plans” or “clever planning.” Alternate translation: “crafty plans” or “clever planning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
409	1CO	3	20	n5pu	writing-quotations	καὶ πάλιν	1		In Paul’s culture, **And again** is a normal way to introduce another quotation from an important text that supports the same point. In this case, Paul quotes from the Old Testament book titled “Psalms” (see [Psalm 94:11](../../psa/94/11.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **And again**, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is introducing another quotation from an important text. Alternate translation: “In another place in the Old Testament it can be read” or “And the book of Psalms also says” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
410	1CO	3	20	la6x	figs-quotations	Κύριος γινώσκει τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς τῶν σοφῶν, ὅτι εἰσὶν μάταιοι	1	The Lord knows that the reasoning of the wise is futile	If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “that the Lord knows the reasonings of the wise, that they are futile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
411	1CO	3	20	gvyq	figs-explicitinfo	γινώσκει τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς τῶν σοφῶν, ὅτι εἰσὶν μάταιοι	1		If the form **the reasonings of the wise, that they** would be redundant in your language, you could express the idea without the redundant words. Alternate translation: “knows that the reasonings of the wise are futile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
412	1CO	3	20	ot38	figs-abstractnouns	τοὺς διαλογισμοὺς τῶν σοφῶν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **reasonings**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “reason” or “plan.” Alternate translation: “the things that the wise reason” or “the things that the wise plan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
413	1CO	3	20	tlk9	figs-nominaladj	τῶν σοφῶν	1		Paul is using the adjective **wise** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this adjective with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “of wise people” or “of those who are wise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
414	1CO	3	20	kz2u		εἰσὶν μάταιοι	1	futile	Alternate translation: “they will come to nothing” or “they are worthless”
415	1CO	3	21	molu	figs-imperative	μηδεὶς καυχάσθω ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1		Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “no one should boast in men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
416	1CO	3	21	xyti	figs-idiom	μηδεὶς καυχάσθω ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1		The phrase **boast in men** means that a person is boasting “about” humans. If your readers would misunderstand **boast in**, you could use a word or phrase that clarifies that the “boasting” has **men** as its content. Alternate translation: “let no one boast about men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
417	1CO	3	21	k9i3	figs-explicit	ἐν ἀνθρώποις	1		The next verse makes it clear that here Paul specifically has leaders in mind. He wishes to tell the Corinthians that they should not boast about having a specific leader that they follow. If this meaning of **in men** would not be understood in your language, you could include some words that clarify that it refers to following leaders. Alternate translation: “in men that they follow” or “in men whose group they are part of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
418	1CO	3	21	ogfq	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1		Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **men**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “in people” or “in men or women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
419	1CO	3	21	g0hr	figs-explicit	πάντα…ὑμῶν ἐστιν	1		Here, **all things are yours** also implies that **boasting in men** is foolish. If the Corinthians have everything, then boasting about following a specific leader does not make sense. All the Corinthians have all the leaders, and much more beyond that (see [3:22](../03/22.md)). If your readers would not infer that **all things are yours** implies these conclusions, you could include a phrase that states these conclusions. Alternate translation: “all things are yours, including all leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
420	1CO	3	22	lrlg	translate-names	Παῦλος…Ἀπολλῶς…Κηφᾶς	1		**Paul**, **Apollos**, and **Cephas** are the names of three men. They are the same men who were mentioned in [1:12](../01/12.md) as leaders whom the Corinthians were claiming to follow. **Cephas** is another name for Peter. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
421	1CO	3	22	x1w6		εἴτε Παῦλος, εἴτε Ἀπολλῶς, εἴτε Κηφᾶς, εἴτε κόσμος, εἴτε ζωὴ, εἴτε θάνατος, εἴτε ἐνεστῶτα, εἴτε μέλλοντα;	1		Paul does not want his readers to think that this list tells the Corinthians everything that they have. Rather, he uses the list to give examples. If your readers would misunderstand this list, you could include a word or phrase that shows that the list gives examples. Alternate translation: “including Paul and Apollos and Cephas and the world and life and death and things present and things to come”
422	1CO	3	22	o3k5	figs-explicit	εἴτε ζωὴ, εἴτε θάνατος	1		When Paul says that **life** and **death** are theirs, he means that neither **life** nor **death** has control over the Corinthians. Rather, they have control over **life** and **death**. What this means is that they can live their lives without being afraid of what will happen while they are alive or afraid of losing their lives when they die. If your readers would misunderstand **life** and **death**, you could add some words that clarify their meaning. Alternate translation: “or confidence in life or peace in death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
423	1CO	3	22	pyir	figs-explicit	εἴτε ἐνεστῶτα, εἴτε μέλλοντα	1		Here Paul refers to **things present** because it refers to what was happening at the time when Paul wrote this letter. On the other hand, **things to come** refers to what is going to happen in the future, specifically when Jesus comes back. The **things present** is the way the world works right now. The **things to come** is the way the world will work when Jesus returns. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of these phrases, you could add some words that clarify their meaning. Alternate translation: “or the current order or the order that Jesus will bring” or “or what happens now or what will happen soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
424	1CO	3	22	jt0x	figs-infostructure	πάντα ὑμῶν	1		Here Paul uses the same phrase he used at the end of [3:21](../03/21.md): **all things are yours**. He repeats the phrase here to explain that the list provides examples of **all things** and also to introduce the point he is about to make in the next verse. Because **all things are yours** ends the list and also introduces the next idea, the ULT begins a new sentence with **all things are yours**. Use whatever form in your language most clearly identifies a conclusion that also introduces the next statement. Alternate translation: “Thus, all things are yours,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
425	1CO	3	23	nj48	figs-possession	ὑμεῖς…Χριστοῦ	1	you are Christ’s, and Christ is God’s	Here Paul uses the possessive form to show the Corinthians that they belong to Christ. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “belong to” or a verb such as “has.” Alternate translation: “you belong to Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
426	1CO	3	23	dc6v	figs-possession	Χριστὸς…Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to show the Corinthians that **Christ** belongs to who **God** is. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea by using a phrase such as “belongs to” or a verb such as “includes.” Alternate translation: “Christ belongs to God” or “who God is includes Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
427	1CO	4	intro	vg5z			0		# 1 Corinthians 4 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>2. Against divisions (1:10–4:15)<br> * God alone is judge (4:1–5)<br> * Present weakness (4:6–15)<br>3. Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20)<br> * Paul’s planned visit (4:16–21)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Judgment<br><br>In [4:3–5](../04/03.md), Paul refers to three different judgments. The first judgment is what humans think of each other, including what they think of Paul. The second is Paul’s own judgment of himself. The third is God’s judgment, which occurs when the Lord returns. Paul argues that the first two judgments are not important and carry no weight. Rather, the only judgment that matters is God’s judgment. Therefore, Paul argues that no one should issue a final verdict about anything until God has performed his judgment ([4:5](../04/05.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/discernment]])<br><br>### Pride<br><br>Paul mentions the Corinthians’ pride many times in this chapter. He speaks specifically of being “puffed up” ([4:6](../04/06.md); [4:18–19](../04/18.md)), and boasting ([4:7](../04/07.md)). In contrast, Paul describes himself and the other apostles as humble and weak ([4:9–13](../04/09.md)). By making this contrast, Paul wants the Corinthians to rethink their opinions about themselves. If the apostles, the leaders of the church, are weak and humble, they need to think again about whether they really are as great as they think they are.<br><br>### Word and power<br><br>In [4:19–20](../04/19.md), Paul contrasts “word” with “power.” This is a common comparison in his culture that contrasts talk and deeds. Anyone can say they are capable of doing something, but only those with “power” can actually do what they claim. Paul introduces this contrast because he is coming to see if those who claim greatness (“word”) can do what they claim (“power”). He argues that “power” is what matters more than “word” because God’s kingdom is a matter of “power,” not “word.” It is about action, not just talk. If your language has a standard comparison between “talk” and “deeds,” you could use it in these verses.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Paul as father<br><br>In [4:14–15](../04/14.md), Paul identifies the Corinthians as his children, which makes him their father. He became their father when he preached the gospel to them. Thus, he is their spiritual father, the one who helped bring them into the Christian life. In the metaphor, Paul does not specify who the mother is, and he does not intend his audience to make an inference as to who it might be. In [4:17](../04/17.md), Paul continues this metaphor by claiming Timothy as his spiritual child. If possible, use words in your language that do not always require biological relationships. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/father]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/children]])<br><br>### The spectacle<br><br>In [4:9](../04/09.md), Paul speaks of the “spectacle” that he and the other apostles participate in. The “spectacle” could be a victory parade in which Paul and the other apostles are prisoners who will be killed, or it could be a gladiatorial performance in an arena in which Paul and the other apostles are destined to die. See the notes on the verse for translation options. Whichever “spectacle” Paul refers to, he is presenting himself and the other apostles as people who are going to be humiliated and killed in public. With this metaphor he continues the theme of Christ working in power through his and others’ weakness. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### Irony<br><br>In [4:8](../04/08.md), Paul says that the Corinthians are satisfied, rich, and reigning. In the second half of the verse, however, he says that he “wishes” that they were actually reigning. The first part of the verse, then, presents how the Corinthians think about themselves. Paul speaks from their perspective in order to show them that their views are foolish and impossible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>In [4:7](../04/07.md) and [4:21](../04/21.md), Paul uses several questions. All the questions in these two verses are not seeking answers that provide information or further knowledge. Rather, all the questions are meant to make the Corinthians think about what they are thinking and doing. For translation options, see the notes on these two verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### “Not beyond what is written”<br><br>In [4:6](../04/06.md), Paul quotes a phrase: “Not beyond what is written.” This is not a quote from Scripture, and Paul does not say where the phrase comes from. However, the way he quotes it shows that both he and the Corinthians were familiar with this saying. Most likely, the phrase is a well-known proverb or wise saying that Paul uses to strengthen his argument. For the meaning of the phrase and translation options, see the notes on that verse.<br><br>### Paul’s coming<br><br>In [4:18–21](../04/18.md), Paul speaks many times about how he will “come” to them. He intends to visit them again, and he speaks in these verses about what his visit might be like. Use words in your language that refer to someone temporarily visiting someone else.
428	1CO	4	1	nkda	figs-explicitinfo	οὕτως ἡμᾶς λογιζέσθω ἄνθρωπος ὡς	1		If the form **In this manner let a man regard us: as** would be redundant in your language, you could express the idea without the redundant words. Alternate translation: “Let a man regard us as” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
429	1CO	4	1	k1v5	figs-imperative	ἡμᾶς λογιζέσθω ἄνθρωπος	1	Connecting Statement:	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should.” Alternate translation: “a man should regard us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
430	1CO	4	1	xt4u	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος	1		Although **man** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **man**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “man or woman” or “human” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
431	1CO	4	1	fk8c	figs-genericnoun	ἄνθρωπος	1		Paul uses the word **man** to speak of people in general, not one specific person. If your readers would misunderstand **man**, you could use a form that indicates people in general in your language. Alternate translation: “everybody” or “any person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
432	1CO	4	1	px42	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς	1		Here, **us** refers to Paul, Apollos, and others who proclaim the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
433	1CO	4	1	if6t	figs-possession	οἰκονόμους μυστηρίων Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **stewards** who are in charge of **the mysteries of God**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “manage” or “oversee.” Alternate translation: “stewards who manage the mysteries of God” or “stewards who oversee the mysteries of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
434	1CO	4	1	duab	figs-possession	μυστηρίων Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **mysteries** that are: (1) revealed by **God**. Alternate translation: “of the mysteries given by God” or “of the mysteries from God” (2) about **God**. Alternate translation: “of the mysteries about God” or “of the mysteries concerning God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
435	1CO	4	2	th8e	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ὧδε λοιπὸν	1	what is required of stewards	Here Paul uses the phrase **In this case** to introduce further information about what it means to be **stewards**. Since he is talking about himself and others who proclaim the gospel as **stewards**, it is important to understand what it is that **stewards** are **required** to do. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could use a word or phrase that introduces more information about a topic. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Speaking of stewards,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
436	1CO	4	2	de61	figs-explicit	ζητεῖται ἐν τοῖς οἰκονόμοις, ἵνα πιστός τις εὑρεθῇ	1		While Paul does not directly apply this sentence to himself and others who proclaim the gospel, it is clear that he intends the reader to apply it to him and these others. Paul then means that he and others who proclaim the gospel are required to do so faithfully by God. If this implication would not be understood by your readers, you could use a word or phrase that makes it clear by identifying Paul as one of the stewards. Alternate translation: “it is required in stewards like us that we be found faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
437	1CO	4	2	qek0	figs-activepassive	ζητεῖται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is required** rather than the on person doing the “requiring.” If you must state who does the action, you could use a vague subject or refer to “masters.” Alternate translation: “people require” or “a master requires” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
438	1CO	4	2	dpeo	figs-activepassive	πιστός τις εὑρεθῇ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **found** rather than the person doing the “finding.” If you must state who does the action, you could use a vague subject or refer to “masters.” Alternate translation: “people find one faithful” or “a master finds one faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
439	1CO	4	2	yesr	writing-pronouns	τις	1		Here Paul uses **one** to refer to any of the **stewards**. If your readers would misunderstand **one**, you could express the idea by using a plural pronoun such as “they.” Alternate translation: “they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
440	1CO	4	3	t133		ἐμοὶ…ἐστιν	1		Alternate translation: “I consider it” or “from my perspective”
441	1CO	4	3	fspp	figs-idiom	εἰς ἐλάχιστόν ἐστιν	1		When Paul says that **it is a very small thing** for him to **be examined**, what he means is that their “examination” of him is unimportant to him. Whether they think he has been faithful or not does not matter to him at all. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this phrase, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “it is no big deal” or “it has no significance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
442	1CO	4	3	k6nc	figs-activepassive	ὑφ’ ὑμῶν ἀνακριθῶ, ἢ ὑπὸ ἀνθρωπίνης ἡμέρας;	1	it is a very small thing that I should be judged by you	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on Paul, who is **examined**, rather than **you** or the **human court**, who does the “examining.” Alternate translation: “you or a human court would examine me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
443	1CO	4	3	l2tt	translate-unknown	ἀνθρωπίνης ἡμέρας	1		Here, the words translated **a human court** refer to an official legal proceeding where whether Paul was faithful or not could be judged by those in charge. Here, he uses the words primarily to refer to any people who are in charge of this legal proceeding. If your readers would misunderstand **a human court**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to an official meeting to decide whether someone is innocent or guilty or a word or phrase that refers to who is in charge at such a meeting. Alternate translation: “a court of law” or “a human jury” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
444	1CO	4	3	skwh	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἀλλ’	1		Here, **For** introduces an even stronger statement about how little Paul cares about being **examined** by humans. He cares so little that he does not even **examine** himself. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could use a word or phrase that normally introduces a further, stronger statement. Alternate translation: “Indeed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
445	1CO	4	4	u9jd	figs-idiom	οὐδὲν…ἐμαυτῷ σύνοιδα	1	I am not aware of any charge being made against me	Paul says that he is **aware of nothing against** himself. By this, he means that he does not know about anything that could be used to accuse him. He is not aware of anything he has done wrong. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this phrase, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “I have a clear conscience” or “I cannot think of any wrong things I have done” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
446	1CO	4	4	h3wl	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐν τούτῳ δεδικαίωμαι;	1	that does not mean I am innocent. It is the Lord who judges me	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on Paul, who is **justified**, rather than what “justifies” him. Alternate translation: “this does not justify me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
447	1CO	4	4	bulo	writing-pronouns	τούτῳ	1		Here, **this** refers back to the whole idea that Paul is **aware of nothing against** himself. If your readers would misunderstand **this**, you could clarify that it refers back to the whole previous statement. Alternate translation: “what I am aware of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
448	1CO	4	4	hjob	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1		Paul uses **but** to introduce a contrast with everyone else who might “examine” Paul (see [4:3–4](../04/03.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a contrast with several previous statements. Alternate translation: “Instead,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
449	1CO	4	4	f6bb		ὁ…ἀνακρίνων με Κύριός ἐστιν.	1		Alternate translation: “the Lord is the one who judges me”
450	1CO	4	5	qi3g	figs-explicitinfo	πρὸ καιροῦ…ἕως ἂν ἔλθῃ ὁ Κύριος	1	Therefore	If the form **before the time, until the Lord comes** contains redundant information that would be unnatural to state in your language, you could express the idea without the redundant words. Alternate translation: “before the Lord comes” or “until the Lord comes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
451	1CO	4	5	t1oq	figs-go	ἔλθῃ	1	Therefore	Here Paul is speaking about how **the Lord** will “come” back to earth at some point in the future. Use a form in your language that could refer to Jesus’ return to earth. Alternate translation: “returns to the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
452	1CO	4	5	wl3i	figs-metaphor	ὃς καὶ φωτίσει τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους	1	He will bring to light the hidden things of darkness and reveal the purposes of the heart	Here Paul speaks as if **the Lord** will bring a flashlight or torch when he comes, and he will use that torch or flashlight to shine **light** on things that are currently **hidden** in the **darkness**. By speaking in this way, Paul means that **the Lord** will reveal what no person knows right now. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this phrase, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “who will both disclose what people do not know about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
453	1CO	4	5	dcje	figs-possession	τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **things** that are **hidden** in **darkness**. If the **hidden things** would not be understood to be in **darkness** in your language, you could express the idea by using a word such “in” or “within.” Alternate translation: “the things hidden in darkness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
454	1CO	4	5	ywuk	figs-abstractnouns	τὰ κρυπτὰ τοῦ σκότους	1		If your language does not use the abstract noun **darkness**, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that describes something that cannot be seen because there is no light, such as “in shadow.” Alternate translation: “the hidden things in shadow” or “the things hidden where no light shines” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
455	1CO	4	5	spwh	figs-possession	τὰς βουλὰς τῶν καρδιῶν	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **purposes** that come from or are created in **the hearts**. If your readers would misunderstand that **the purposes** are located in **the hearts**, you could express the idea by using a word such as “from” or “in.” Alternate translation: “the purposes in the hearts” or “the purposes from the hearts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
456	1CO	4	5	tgdg	translate-unknown	τὰς βουλὰς	1		Here, **purposes** refers to how humans have specific goals in mind and plan ways of attaining those goals. If your readers would misunderstand **purposes**, you could use a word such as “plans” or “intentions.” Alternate translation: “the plans” or “the intentions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
457	1CO	4	5	tgox	figs-metonymy	τῶν καρδιῶν	1		In Paul’s culture, **hearts** are the places where humans think and plan. If your readers would misunderstand **hearts**, you could refer to the place where humans think in your culture or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “of the minds” or “that humans plan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
458	1CO	4	5	pw6r	figs-idiom	ὁ ἔπαινος γενήσεται ἑκάστῳ ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul speaks as if **praise** were something that could **come** or travel from **God** to humans. Paul means that **God** is the source of the **praise** that **each one** will receive. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of this sentence, you could translate it so that **God** is the one who gives the **praise**. Alternate translation: “God will give praise to each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
459	1CO	4	5	kcya	figs-explicit	ὁ ἔπαινος γενήσεται ἑκάστῳ ἀπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ	1		Here Paul might seem to be saying that every person will receive some **praise** from **God**. However, Paul does not mean that. Instead, he only gives the example of the person who has been faithful to God, not the example of the person who has not been faithful to God. If your readers would misunderstand why Paul uses only one example, you could clarify that this example is only about those who are faithful, or you could include the opposite example about those who have been unfaithful. Alternate translation: “the praise from God will come to each faithful one” or “the praise and blame from God will come to each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
460	1CO	4	6	agfz	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers back to everything Paul has said about himself and Apollos in [3:4–23](../03/04.md). If your readers would misunderstand what **these things** refers to, you could clarify that it refers to what Paul has said about farming and building. Alternate translation: “what I have said about farming and building” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
461	1CO	4	6	ijn5	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφοί	1	brothers	Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
462	1CO	4	6	xxp2	translate-names	Ἀπολλῶν	1		**Apollos** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
463	1CO	4	6	ymxi	figs-exclusive	ἡμῖν	1		Here, **us** refers to Paul and Apollos only. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
464	1CO	4	6	ziz9	figs-quotations	μάθητε, τό μὴ ὑπὲρ ἃ γέγραπται	1	for your sakes	If your language does not use this form, you could translate this statement as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “you might learn not to go beyond what is written” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
465	1CO	4	6	o02a	figs-explicit	τό μὴ ὑπὲρ ἃ γέγραπται,	1		Here Paul quotes a short phrase that is not from the Old Testament but that would have been well-known to the Corinthians. The phrase **what is written** could refer to: (1) the Old Testament scriptures. Paul is telling the Corinthians that they should only act in ways that the Old Testament approves. Alternate translation: “Not beyond what the Scriptures say” (2) general principles of life that everyone knows about. Paul is telling the Corinthians that they should only act in ways that are generally approved and accepted. Alternate translation: “Not beyond proper standards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
466	1CO	4	6	kyrt	figs-activepassive	γέγραπται	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on what **is written** rather than on the person doing the “writing.” If you must state who does the action, you could express it so that: (1) the Scriptures or scriptural author writes or speaks the words. Alternate translation: “the authors of Scripture have written” (2) God speaks the words. Alternate translation: “God has said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
467	1CO	4	6	hk55	figs-infostructure	ἵνα	2		The statement introduced by **so that** could be the purpose for: (1) learning that they should not go **beyond what is written**. Alternate translation: “with the goal that” (2) Paul applying **these things** to himself and Apollos. Alternate translation: “so that, in the end,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
468	1CO	4	6	e79m	figs-activepassive	μὴ εἷς…φυσιοῦσθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the person “puffs” himself or herself up. Alternate translation: “no one would puff himself or herself up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
469	1CO	4	6	hjfu	writing-pronouns	τοῦ ἑνὸς…τοῦ ἑτέρου	1		Here, **the one** and **the other** refer to any specific leaders the Corinthians might praise or blame. Perhaps Paul specifically has himself and Apollos in mind, but he intentionally uses words that would include any leader whom the Corinthians could praise or blame. If your readers would misunderstand **the one** and **the other**, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that indicates that Paul is speaking generally of any leaders here. Alternate translation: “of any leader … any other leader” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
470	1CO	4	7	fnu3	figs-yousingular	σε…ἔχεις…ἔλαβες…ἔλαβες…καυχᾶσαι…λαβών	1	between you … do you have that you did not … you have freely … do you boast … you had not	In this verse, Paul uses the singular form for **you**. He does this in order to directly address each specific person among the Corinthian believers. In the next verse, he again uses the plural form of “you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
471	1CO	4	7	gtb5	figs-rquestion	τίς…σε διακρίνει?	1	For who makes you superior?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no one.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is no one who makes you superior.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
472	1CO	4	7	r6yw	figs-rquestion	τί…ἔχεις ὃ οὐκ ἔλαβες?	1	What do you have that you did not freely receive?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “nothing.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “there is nothing that you have that you did not receive.” or “you received everything that you have.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
473	1CO	4	7	eixw	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ δὲ καὶ ἔλαβες	1		Paul is speaking as if “receiving it” were a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “And since you indeed received it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
474	1CO	4	7	e8l2	figs-rquestion	τί καυχᾶσαι ὡς μὴ λαβών?	1	why do you boast as if you had not done so?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. Here, there is no answer to the question, since that is exactly Paul’s point. There is no reason for them to **boast**. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea as an imperative or a “should” statement. Alternate translation: “do not boast as if you did not receive it.” or “you should not boast as if you did not receive it.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
475	1CO	4	7	p0hg	writing-pronouns	ἔλαβες…λαβών	2		Here, both uses of **it** refer back to **what** the Corinthians **have**. If your language does not use **it** to refer to an unstated “thing,” you could use a word or phrase that does refer clearly back to **what** the Corinthians **have**. Alternate translation: “you received everything … you did … receive everything” or “you received what you have … you did … receive what you have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
476	1CO	4	8	yp8s	figs-irony	ἤδη κεκορεσμένοι ἐστέ, ἤδη ἐπλουτήσατε, χωρὶς ἡμῶν ἐβασιλεύσατε	1	General Information:	With these statements, Paul is stating what he thinks the Corinthians would say about themselves. He does not mean that he believes that these things are true. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could include some words that clarify that Paul is speaking from the Corinthians’s perspective, such as “it is as if” or “you say.” Alternate translation: “Already it is as if you are satisfied! Already it is as if you have become rich! It is as if you began to reign apart from us” or “Already you say that you are satisfied! Already you say that you have become rich! You say that you have begun to reign apart from us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
477	1CO	4	8	v77u	figs-metaphor	κεκορεσμένοι ἐστέ	1		Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians have had more than enough food to eat and beverages to drink. By this, he means that (they think that) they have so many spiritual blessings that there are no more that they can receive. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of **satisfied**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you are stuffed with blessings” or “you have every spiritual gift” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
478	1CO	4	8	uc7s	figs-metaphor	ἐπλουτήσατε	1		Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians have become wealthy people. He speaks in this way to again emphasize that (they think that) they have more spiritual blessings than they need. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of **become rich**, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you have become fat” or “you have an excess of spiritual gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
479	1CO	4	8	mpir	figs-exclusive	ἡμῶν…ἡμεῖς	1		Here, **us** and **we** refer to Paul and others who proclaim the gospel. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
480	1CO	4	9	bb41	grammar-connect-words-phrases	γάρ	1	God has put us apostles on display	Here, **For** introduces evidence that Paul and the other apostles are not “reigning” right now. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could express the idea by using a contrast word such as “rather” or use a word or phrase that indicates that this sentence provides evidence that Paul is not “reigning.” Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “You can tell we are not reigning, since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
481	1CO	4	9	v0bg	translate-unknown	δοκῶ	1		Here, **I think** introduces Paul’s own opinion of what he and other **apostles** are meant to do and experience. If your readers would misunderstand **I think**, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that introduces a person’s interpretation or opinion. Alternate translation: “in my opinion,” or “it seems to me that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
482	1CO	4	9	lz8v	figs-exclusive	ἡμᾶς…ἐγενήθημεν	1		Here, **we** and **us** refer to Paul and his fellow apostles. It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
483	1CO	4	9	vfq3	figs-metaphor	ἡμᾶς τοὺς ἀποστόλους ἐσχάτους ἀπέδειξεν, ὡς ἐπιθανατίους	1	has put us apostles on display	Here Paul uses a metaphor that identifies himself and other apostles as those who receive public humiliation and are put to death. The metaphor itself could: (1) refer to a Roman gladiatorial contest. The apostles, then, would be **exhibited** in the arena as part of the **last** event. As those who are **sentenced to death**, they would then die in this last event. Alternate translation: “has exhibited us apostles in the last event of the gladiatorial games, in which we are destined to die” (2) refer to a victory parade. The apostles, then, would be **exhibited** at the end of the parade, or **last**. As the **last** prisoners, they are **sentenced to death**, and will be killed soon after the parade ends. Alternate translation: “has exhibited us apostles at the end of the victory parade, in the place where prisoners who are sentenced to death march” (3) be a figure of speech that your readers would misunderstand. If this is the case, you could express the idea in non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “has chosen us apostles to be humiliated, and we are destined to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
484	1CO	4	9	ayu9	translate-unknown	ἐσχάτους	1		Here, **last of all** could identify: (1) the time when the **apostles** are **exhibited**, which would be as the last event held in the arena. Alternate translation: “at the end” (2) the place where the **apostles** are **exhibited**, which would be at the end of the victory parade. Alternate translation: “last in line” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
485	1CO	4	9	e4i1	figs-metaphor	θέατρον ἐγενήθημεν τῷ κόσμῳ, καὶ ἀγγέλοις καὶ ἀνθρώποις	1		Here Paul speaks as if he and other apostles were part of a gladiatorial game or a theatrical show. He speaks in this way to show that the humiliation and death he and other apostles suffer happens in public, with everyone watching to see what happens. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “we live in full view of the world—both of angels and of men” or “we undergo these things publicly, before the world—both angels and men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
486	1CO	4	9	cqh4	figs-infostructure	τῷ κόσμῳ, καὶ ἀγγέλοις καὶ ἀνθρώποις	1	to the world—to angels, and to human beings	This structure could mean that: (1) Paul wants to define the **world** as **angels** and **men**. Alternate translation: “to the world, that is, both to angels and to men” (2) Paul is listing three different things. Alternate translation: “to the world, to angels, and to men.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
487	1CO	4	9	d8da	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώποις	1		Although **men** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to anyone, whether men or women. If your readers would misunderstand **men**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to men and women” or “to people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
488	1CO	4	10	ds54	figs-ellipsis	ἡμεῖς μωροὶ διὰ Χριστόν, ὑμεῖς δὲ φρόνιμοι ἐν Χριστῷ; ἡμεῖς ἀσθενεῖς, ὑμεῖς δὲ ἰσχυροί; ὑμεῖς ἔνδοξοι, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἄτιμοι	1		In Paul’s language, he did not need to include **{are}**. However, many languages, including English, must add **{are}**, which is why the ULT includes it in brackets. If your language would not use **{are}** here, you could leave it unexpressed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
489	1CO	4	10	johq	figs-exclusive	ἡμεῖς	-1		Here, **we** refers to Paul and the other “apostles.” It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
490	1CO	4	10	fkw2	figs-irony	ἡμεῖς μωροὶ…ἡμεῖς ἀσθενεῖς…ἡμεῖς…ἄτιμοι	1	We are fools … in dishonor	With these statements, Paul identifies what he and the other apostles are like from the perspective of this world. They are **fools**, **weak**, and **dishonored**. Paul does know that from God’s perspective they are actually “wise,” “strong,” and “honored.” However, he speaks from the perspective of this world to help the Corinthians change their thinking. Instead of wanting to be **wise**, **strong**, and **honored**, the Corinthians need to realize that following God will instead make them appear to this world as **fools**, **weak**, and **dishonored**. If your readers would misunderstand the meaning of these statements, you could use a word or phrase that clarifies that they are spoken from a different perspective. Alternate translation: “We {seem to be} fools … We {seem to be} weak … we {seem to be} dishonored” or “According to the world, we {are} fools … According to the word, we {are} weak … according to the world, we {are} dishonored’ (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
491	1CO	4	10	ufj2	figs-irony	ὑμεῖς δὲ φρόνιμοι…ὑμεῖς δὲ ἰσχυροί…ὑμεῖς ἔνδοξοι	1		With these statements, Paul identifies what the Corinthians think about themselves. They think they are **wise**, **strong**, and **honored** from the perspective of this world. Paul contrasts what the Corinthians think about themselves and how he and other apostles look from the world’s perspective in order to make the Corinthians reconsider what they think about themselves. If your readers would misunderstand these statements, you could use a word or phrase that identifies that they are spoken from the perspective of the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “but you consider yourselves wise … but you consider yourselves strong … You consider yourselves honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
492	1CO	4	10	wqh7	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1	You are held in honor	Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, explains: (1) the means by which God has made the Corinthians **wise**. Alternate translation: “by means of your union with Christ” (2) the reason why God has made the Corinthians **wise**. Alternate translation: “because of your union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
493	1CO	4	10	d1s9	figs-infostructure	ὑμεῖς ἔνδοξοι, ἡμεῖς δὲ ἄτιμοι.	1		Paul changes the order of the last item in the list, putting **You** in front of **we**. In his culture, this is one way to identify the last item in a list. If your readers would misunderstand the change in order, you could match the order that Paul uses for the first two items. Alternate translation: “We {are} dishonored, but you {are} honored” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
494	1CO	4	11	i298	figs-idiom	ἄχρι τῆς ἄρτι ὥρας	1	Up to this present hour	In Paul’s culture, the phrase **Up to this present hour** means that what Paul is about to say has been happening and continues to happen up to the time when he writes this letter. If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “To this very day” “All the time that we serve Christ,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
495	1CO	4	11	k3f1	figs-exclusive	πεινῶμεν	1		Here, **we** refers to Paul and the other “apostles.” It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
496	1CO	4	11	hqco	translate-unknown	γυμνιτεύομεν	1		Here, **are poorly clothed** means that the clothing is old and worn and barely covers a person’s body. If your readers would misunderstand **are poorly clothed**, use a word or phrase that identifies clothing that barely covers a person. Alternate translation: “are clothed in rags” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
497	1CO	4	11	jj2y	figs-activepassive	καὶ κολαφιζόμεθα, καὶ	1	we are brutally beaten	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **we** who are **beaten** rather than the people doing the “beating.” If you must state who does the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “and people brutally beat us, and we” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
498	1CO	4	11	yhf4	translate-unknown	ἀστατοῦμεν	1	we are homeless	Here, **are homeless** means that Paul and the other apostles do not have a permanent residence or a house that they own. It does not mean that they never had a place to stay. If your readers would misunderstand **are homeless**, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that Paul and the other apostles do not have a permanent residence. Alternate translation: “do not own homes” or “are always on the move” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
499	1CO	4	12	exfo	figs-exclusive	ἰδίαις…εὐλογοῦμεν…ἀνεχόμεθα	1		Here, **our** and **we** refer to Paul and other “apostles.” They do not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
500	1CO	4	12	ushf	figs-doublet	κοπιῶμεν, ἐργαζόμενοι	1		Here, the words **working hard** and **working** mean basically the same thing. Paul uses both words to emphasize how **hard** he is working. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these words and indicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “are working very hard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
501	1CO	4	12	e0mz	figs-idiom	ἐργαζόμενοι ταῖς ἰδίαις χερσίν	1		In Paul’s culture, the phrase **with our own hands** indicates that Paul and other apostles were doing manual labor. In fact, we know that Paul himself made tents (see [Acts 18:3](../act/018/03.md)), so that is probably the manual labor which he refers to here. If **with our hands** would not refer to manual labor in your language, you could use a comparable idiom or an expression that refers to manual labor. Alternate translation: “doing physically demanding work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
502	1CO	4	12	z6fg	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	λοιδορούμενοι…διωκόμενοι	1		The phrases **Being reviled** and **being persecuted** identify the situations in which Paul and other apostles **bless** and **endure**. If your readers would misunderstand this relationship, you could: (1) include a word such as “when” to indicate that these actions happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “Any time we are reviled … any time we are persecuted” (2) include a word such as “although” to indicate that these actions are in contrast with each other. Alternate translation: “Although we are reviled … although we are persecuted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
503	1CO	4	12	n389	figs-activepassive	λοιδορούμενοι	1	When we are reviled, we bless	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **reviled** rather than the people doing the “reviling.” If you must state who does the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Others reviling us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
504	1CO	4	12	o7jz	translate-unknown	λοιδορούμενοι	1		Here, **Being reviled** refers to someone abusing another person with words. If that meaning for **Being reviled** would not be obvious in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does refer to using abusive words about another person. Alternate translation: “Being slandered” or “Being attacked verbally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
505	1CO	4	12	l71q	figs-explicit	εὐλογοῦμεν	1		Here Paul does not state whom or what they **bless**. He could mean that they **bless**: (1) the people who “revile” them. Alternate translation: “we bless in return” (2) God, even though they are suffering. Alternate translation: “we bless God anyway” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
506	1CO	4	12	kue7	figs-activepassive	διωκόμενοι	1	When we are persecuted	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **persecuted** rather than the people doing the “persecuting.” If you must state who does the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Others persecuting us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
507	1CO	4	13	xvn4	figs-exclusive	παρακαλοῦμεν…ἐγενήθημεν	1		Here, **we** refers to Paul and other “apostles.” It does not include the Corinthians. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
508	1CO	4	13	l3ns	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	δυσφημούμενοι	1		The phrase **being slandered** identifies the situation in which Paul and other apostles **comfort**. If your readers would misunderstand this relationship, you could: (1) include a word such as “when” to indicate that these actions happen at the same time. Alternate translation: “Any time we are slandered” (2) include a word such as “although” to indicate that these actions are in contrast with each other. Alternate translation: “Although we are slandered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
509	1CO	4	13	a6hp	figs-activepassive	δυσφημούμενοι	1	When we are slandered	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **slandered** rather than the people doing the “slandering.” If you must state who does the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “others slandering us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
510	1CO	4	13	p0fd	figs-simile	ὡς περικαθάρματα τοῦ κόσμου ἐγενήθημεν, πάντων περίψημα	1		Here Paul says that he and other apostles are like **scum** and **refuse**, both of which are words that describe garbage. Paul speaks in this way to show that **the world** considers him and other apostles to be worthless, just like garbage is worthless and should be thrown away. If your readers would misunderstand this simile, you could express the idea with a comparable image or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “We have no value according to the world’s perspective” or “We have become like a heap of garbage” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
511	1CO	4	13	uubg	figs-doublet	περικαθάρματα τοῦ κόσμου…πάντων περίψημα	1		Here Paul uses two different words for garbage. The word **scum** refers to what people throw away after they clean something. The word **refuse** refers to dirt or filth that people wipe or scrub off an object. Paul uses two very similar words in order to emphasize that the world thinks that he and other apostles are like garbage. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these phrases. Alternate translation: “the filthy scum of all the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
512	1CO	4	13	gqxj	figs-possession	περικαθάρματα τοῦ κόσμου	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe what **the world** identifies as **scum**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could use a short phrase to clarify that **scum** is what **the world** thinks he and other apostles are. Alternate translation: “what the world considers scum” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
513	1CO	4	13	flf9	figs-synecdoche	τοῦ κόσμου	1		When Paul uses **the world** in this context, he is not referring primarily to everything that God has made. Rather, he uses **the world** to refer to human beings who do not believe in Jesus. If your readers would misunderstand **the world**, you could use an expression that refers to human beings in general. Alternate translation: “of human beings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
514	1CO	4	13	ip6p	figs-possession	πάντων περίψημα	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe **refuse** that: (1) comes from **all things**. Alternate translation: “the refuse from all things” (2) **all** people consider to be garbage. Alternate translation: “what all people consider to be refuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
515	1CO	4	13	z4tt	figs-idiom	ἕως ἄρτι	1		Here Paul ends this sentence in a similar way to how he began his sentence in [4:11](../04/11.md). In Paul’s culture, the phrase **even until now** means that what Paul speaks about has been happening and continues to happen up to the time when he writes this letter. If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “to this very day” “all the time we serve Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
516	1CO	4	14	k1at	figs-infostructure	οὐκ ἐντρέπων ὑμᾶς γράφω ταῦτα, ἀλλ’ ὡς τέκνα μου ἀγαπητὰ, νουθετῶ	1	I do not write these things to shame you, but to correct you	If your language would not put the negative statement before the positive statement, you could reverse them. Alternate translation: “I correct {you} as my beloved children. I do not write these things as shaming you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
517	1CO	4	14	r9pj	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἐντρέπων ὑμᾶς	1		Here, the phrase **as shaming you** introduces what Paul did **not write** to do. If your readers would not understand **as shaming** as a purpose, you could use a word or phrase that does clearly indicate purpose. Alternate translation: “in order to shame you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
518	1CO	4	14	nlzx	writing-pronouns	ταῦτα	1		Here, **these things** refers back to what Paul has already written, focusing on [4:6–13](../04/06.md). If your readers would misunderstand **these things**, you could use a word or phrase that refers back to what Paul has just finished writing. Alternate translation: “what I have said about us apostles and you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
519	1CO	4	14	t8jc	grammar-connect-logic-result	ὡς τέκνα μου ἀγαπητὰ	1	correct	Here, the phrase **as my beloved children** could introduce: (1) the reason why Paul corrects the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “because you are my beloved children” (2) the way in which he corrects the Corinthians. Alternate translation: “as a father corrects his beloved children, so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
520	1CO	4	14	ruu5	figs-metaphor	τέκνα μου ἀγαπητὰ	1	my beloved children	Here Paul speaks of the Corinthians as if they were his **beloved children**. He speaks in this way because he is their spiritual father, the one who first preached the good news to them. Also, he loves them in the same way a father loves his own children. If your readers would misunderstand why Paul calls the Corinthians his **beloved children**, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “my beloved younger siblings” or “fellow believers whom I love” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
521	1CO	4	15	ur1i	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ἐὰν…μυρίους παιδαγωγοὺς ἔχητε ἐν Χριστῷ	1		Here Paul is making a conditional statement that sounds hypothetical, but he is already convinced that the condition is not true. He knows that the Corinthians do not have **myriads of guardians**, but he speaks in this way to emphasize that they have only one spiritual father, no matter how many **guardians** they have. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “even if you somehow had myriads of guardians in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
522	1CO	4	15	n8c1	figs-hyperbole	μυρίους παιδαγωγοὺς	1	ten thousand guardians	Here, **myriads of guardians** is an exaggeration that the Corinthians would have understood to mean a large number of **guardians**. If your readers would misunderstand **myriads**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to a large number. Alternate translation: “many guardians” or “a large number of guardians” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
523	1CO	4	15	nkcc	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ	1		Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, could identify: (1) that these **guardians** are helping the Corinthians in their union with Christ. Alternate translation: “who work to unite you more strongly to Christ” (2) the guardians as fellow believers in Jesus. Alternate translation: “who believe in Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
524	1CO	4	15	d25x	figs-ellipsis	οὐ πολλοὺς πατέρας	1		Here Paul omits some words that may be essential in your language to create a complete thought. In English, these words are essential, so they have been included in the ULT in brackets. If you can translate this sentence without these words, you could do so here. Otherwise, you could retain these words as they appear in the ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
525	1CO	4	15	yij4		οὐ πολλοὺς πατέρας	1		Alternate translation: “{you would have} only one father”
526	1CO	4	15	j01t	figs-exmetaphor	οὐ πολλοὺς πατέρας; ἐν γὰρ Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ διὰ τοῦ εὐαγγελίου, ἐγὼ ὑμᾶς ἐγέννησα.	1		Here Paul speaks of himself as a “father” to the Corinthian believers. He became their father **through the gospel**, which means that he is their spiritual father. He is the one who preached the **gospel** to them when they became united to **Christ Jesus**, and that makes him the one who **fathered** them. If your readers would misunderstand how Paul speaks about **fathers**, you could clarify that Paul refers to “spiritual” **fathers**. Alternate translation: “{you would} not {have} many spiritual fathers; for I fathered you spiritually in Christ Jesus through the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
527	1CO	4	15	m9ek	figs-metaphor	ἐν…Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	2	I became your father in Christ Jesus through the gospel	Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ**, or united to Christ, could explain: (1) that the Corinthians became united to Christ when Paul preached the good news to them. Alternate translation: “when you were united to Christ Jesus” (2) Paul is their father in the Christian family, the family that is united to Christ. Alternate translation: “in the Christian family” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
528	1CO	4	16	vkao	figs-abstractnouns	μιμηταί μου γίνεσθε	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **imitators**, you could express the idea by using a verbal such as “imitate.” Alternate translation: “imitate me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
529	1CO	4	17	lrqn	writing-pronouns	διὰ τοῦτο	1		Here, **this** refers back to what Paul said in the previous verse about imitating him. If your readers would misunderstand what **this** refers to, you could clarify that it refers back to the previous verse. Alternate translation: “For that reason” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
530	1CO	4	17	r7z7		ἔπεμψα	1		Sometimes, Paul uses the past tense **sent** with reference to the person who carries the letter to its destination. However, Paul later speaks of Timothy visiting them as only a possibility (see [16:10](../16/10.md)). Therefore, the visit to which Paul refers here could: (1) have already happened by the time Paul is writing this letter. Timothy would be visiting the Corinthians while Paul is writing this letter, since Paul uses the future tense to refer to how Timothy **will remind** them of Paul’s ways. Alternate translation: “I have sent” (2) be when Timothy brings the letter to them, at which time he **will remind** them of his ways. Alternate translation: “I am sending”
531	1CO	4	17	hi7w	figs-metaphor	ὅς ἐστίν μου τέκνον, ἀγαπητὸν καὶ πιστὸν	1	my beloved and faithful child in the Lord	Here Paul speaks of **Timothy** as if he were his own **child**. This continues the metaphor about Paul as a spiritual father from [4:15](../04/15.md). Paul is Timothy’s spiritual father, and Paul loves **Timothy** in the way a father loves his child. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “who is my beloved and faithful spiritual child” or “whom I love and who is faithful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
532	1CO	4	17	nwqz	figs-metaphor	ἐν Κυρίῳ	1		Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in the Lord** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in the Lord**, or united to the Lord, identifies Timothy as someone who faithfully does what he is called to do in his union with **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “in his union with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
533	1CO	4	17	oqd7	figs-metaphor	τὰς ὁδούς μου τὰς ἐν	1		Here Paul speaks of how he lives and what he does as **my ways**, which refers to the paths that Paul walks on. This way of speaking is related to how Paul has already spoken of behavior as “walking” (see [3:3](../03/03.md)). The phrase **my ways** could identify: (1) how Paul thinks and lives. Alternate translation: “the way that I live in” (2) the principles that Paul follows concerning how to think and live. Alternate translation: “the principles that I follow in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
534	1CO	4	17	cq9z	figs-metaphor	ἐν Χριστῷ Ἰησοῦ	1		Here Paul uses the spatial metaphor **in Christ Jesus** to describe the union of believers with Christ. In this case, being **in Christ Jesus**, or united to Christ Jesus, describes Paul’s **ways** as ways that are appropriate for those united to Christ Jesus. Alternate translation: “appropriate in union with Christ Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
535	1CO	4	17	j6gj	figs-explicit	καθὼς…διδάσκω	1		Here Paul does not explicitly state what it is that he is teaching. From the previous words, however, it is clear that he teaches his **ways**, the same **ways** that Timothy will **remind** them about. If you need to clarify what Paul teaches, you could refer to the **ways** explicitly. Alternate translation: “the same ways that I teach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
536	1CO	4	17	xs5y	figs-hyperbole	πανταχοῦ ἐν πάσῃ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1		Here Paul speaks as if Paul has been **everywhere** and visited **every church**. The Corinthians would have understood this to refer to **everywhere** and **every church** that Paul has visited. If your readers would misunderstand **everywhere** and **every church**, you could clarify that Paul refers to **every** place and church he has visited. Alternate translation: “everywhere I go and in every church that I visit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
537	1CO	4	18	v4fn	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δέ	1	Now	Here, **Now** introduces a development in the argument. Paul starts addressing some of the Corinthians who are proud. If **Now** does not introduce a new part of the argument in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does do this. Alternate translation: “Moving on,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
538	1CO	4	17	wdug	figs-doublet	πανταχοῦ ἐν πάσῃ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1		Here, the words **everywhere** and **in every church** have very similar meanings. Paul repeats the idea to emphasize that he teaches the **ways** in every church, not just among the Corinthians. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine the two phrases into one. Alternate translation: “in every church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
539	1CO	4	18	th6i	writing-pronouns	τινες	1		The word **some** refers to **some** of the Corinthians. If your readers would misunderstand what **some** refers to, you could clarify that it identifies **some** Corinthian believers. Alternate translation: “some from among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
540	1CO	4	18	flbr	figs-activepassive	ἐφυσιώθησάν	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the people “puff” themselves up. Alternate translation: “have puffed themselves up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
541	1CO	4	18	gap0	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ὡς	1		Here Paul speaks of him **not coming** as something that is a possibility. However, he is convinced that this is not true, since he will “come” to them. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “as if” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
542	1CO	4	18	sq6q	figs-go	μὴ ἐρχομένου…μου	1		Here Paul is speaking about his plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. Use a form in your language that indicates future travel plans to visit someone. Alternate translation: “I were not about to arrive where you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
543	1CO	4	19	jdk5	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	δὲ	1	I will come to you	Here, **But** introduces a contrast with what some people are thinking in the previous verse, that is, that Paul is not going to visit them. In this verse, he says that he will visit them soon. Use a word or phrase in your language that introduces a strong contrast. Alternate translation: “Despite what they think,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
544	1CO	4	19	y1sl	figs-infostructure	ἐλεύσομαι…ταχέως πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ἐὰν ὁ Κύριος θελήσῃ	1		If your language would put the **if** statement first, you could rearrange these two clauses. Alternate translation: “if the Lord wills, I will come to you soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
545	1CO	4	19	hr6o	figs-go	ἐλεύσομαι…πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1		Here Paul is speaking about his plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. Use a form in your language that indicates future travel plans to visit someone. Alternate translation: “I will arrive where you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
546	1CO	4	19	eyq3	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν ὁ Κύριος θελήσῃ	1		Here Paul says that he will only visit the Corinthians **if the Lord wills**. He is not sure whether the Lord will “will” or not. Use a form in your language that indicates a true hypothetical. Alternate translation: “only if the Lord wills, of course” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
547	1CO	4	19	tdbk	figs-explicit	τὸν λόγον…τὴν δύναμιν	1		The contrast between **word** and **power** was well known in Paul’s culture. The contrast states that people can say many things, but they cannot always do what they say they can. If your language has a way to express this contrast between “talk” and “action,” you could use it here. Alternate translation: “the talk … their deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
548	1CO	4	19	kbp1	figs-metonymy	τὸν λόγον τῶν πεφυσιωμένων	1		Here, **word** figuratively represents what someone says in words. If your readers would misunderstand **word**, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what these who have been puffed up say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
549	1CO	4	19	fz8n	figs-activepassive	τῶν πεφυσιωμένων	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the people “puff” themselves up. Alternate translation: “of these people who have puffed themselves up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
550	1CO	4	19	m92u	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν δύναμιν	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **power**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “how powerful they are” or “their powerful deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
551	1CO	4	20	iucw	figs-metaphor	οὐ…ἐν λόγῳ ἡ Βασιλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἀλλ’ ἐν δυνάμει	1		Here Paul speaks as if **the kingdom of God** exists **in**, not **word**, but **power**. By this, he means that **the kingdom of God** does not consist in what people say but in what they do. To say it another way, **word**, or what people say, by itself does not make people part of God’s kingdom. Rather, it takes God’s **power** working for and through people to make them part of God’s kingdom. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God consists not in word but in power” or “the kingdom of God is not about word but about power” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
552	1CO	4	20	shgb	figs-explicit	ἐν λόγῳ…ἀλλ’ ἐν δυνάμει	1		The contrast between **word** and **power** was well-known in Paul’s culture. The contrast states that people can say many things, but they cannot always do what they say they can do. If your language has a way to express this contrast between “talk” and “action,” you could use it here. Alternate translation: “not in talk but in deeds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
553	1CO	4	20	gfhp	figs-metonymy	λόγῳ	1		Here, **word** figuratively represents what someone says in words. If your readers would misunderstand **word**, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “what people say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
554	1CO	4	20	wzpo	figs-abstractnouns	δυνάμει	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **power**, you could express the idea another way. Alternate translation: “powerful deeds” or “what people powerfully do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
555	1CO	4	21	ix5g	figs-rquestion	τί θέλετε?	1	What do you want?	Paul asks the Corinthians **What** they **want** because he wants them to realize that their behavior will show him how to respond to them. He does not want the Corinthians to tell him all their desires. Rather, he presents two options in the rest of the verse, and the question **What do you want?** shows the Corinthians that they can choose between those two options by listening to Paul or choosing not to listen to him. If your language does not use a question to express this idea, you could translate the question in statement form. Alternate translation: “Depending on what you do, I will behave towards you in one of two ways.” or “How you respond to me will tell me how to respond to you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
556	1CO	4	21	wv61	figs-rquestion	ἐν ῥάβδῳ ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς, ἢ ἐν ἀγάπῃ, πνεύματί τε πραΰτητος?	1	Shall I come to you with a rod or with love and in a spirit of gentleness?	Here Paul uses a question to present the two options for how he could act toward the Corinthians when he “comes” to them. He asks a question for the same reason he asked the first question in this verse. He wants them to realize that how they choose to respond to him will dictate how he will act when he visits. If they do not listen to him, he will **come with a rod**. If they do listen, he will come **with love and a spirit of gentleness**. If your language does not use a question to express this idea, you could translate the question in statement form. Alternate translation: “I will either come to you with a rod or with love and a spirit of gentleness.” or “If you do not listen, I will come to you with a rod. If you do listen, I will come to you with love and a spirit of gentleness.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
557	1CO	4	21	iscw	figs-go	ἔλθω πρὸς ὑμᾶς	1	Shall I come to you with a rod or with love and in a spirit of gentleness?	Here Paul is speaking about his plan to visit the Corinthians at some point. Use a form in your language that indicates future travel plans to visit someone. Alternate translation: “Shall I arrive where you live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
558	1CO	4	21	bl1d	figs-metaphor	ἐν ῥάβδῳ	1		Paul speaks of coming **with a rod** as if he is going to physically beat the Corinthians to teach them to listen to him. This metaphor may continue the way in which he speaks of himself as a “father” in [4:14–15](../04/14.md), since fathers could punish their children physically **with a rod** if they did not obey. By speaking in this way, Paul thus refers to discipline or punishment, but the discipline he threatens will not be physical. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a word or phrase that would describe discipline or punishment, or you could express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “to punish you” or “with a harsh rebuke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
559	1CO	4	21	h4oj	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀγάπῃ…τε	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **love**, you could express the idea by using an adverb such as “lovingly” or a verb such as “love.” Alternate translation: “shall I love you with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
560	1CO	4	21	u7b9	figs-possession	πνεύματί…πραΰτητος	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to describe a **spirit** that is characterized by **gentleness**. If your language would not use the possessive form to express that idea, you could express the idea by translating **gentleness** as an adjective, such as “gentle.” Alternate translation: “a gentle spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
561	1CO	4	21	hpmb	translate-unknown	πνεύματί	1		Here, **spirit** does not refer to God’s Spirit, the Holy Spirit. Rather, it refers to Paul’s spirit. In Paul’s culture, **as spirit of** something is a way to describe a person’s attitude that is characterized by that thing. Here, then, Paul speaks about an attitude that is gentle. If your readers would misunderstand **spirit**, you could use a word such as “attitude” to express the idea. Alternate translation: “an attitude” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
562	1CO	4	21	ix7l	figs-abstractnouns	πραΰτητος	1	of gentleness	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **gentleness**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “gentle.” Alternate translation: “that is gentle” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
563	1CO	5	intro	vb3l			0		# 1 Corinthians 5 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>3. Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20)<br> * Paul condemns a sexually immoral man (5:1–5)<br> * Passover festival metaphor (5:6–8)<br> * Explanation of previous letter (5:9–13)<br><br>Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words of verse 13. Verse 13 quotes from Deuteronomy 17:7.<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Sexual immorality<br><br>This chapter deals mostly with what Paul calls “sexual immorality” ([5:1](../05/01.md), [9–11](../05/9.md)). The word Paul uses for “sexual immorality” is a general term for sexual behavior that is considered improper. The specific type of “sexual immorality” that Paul addresses in this chapter is a man having sex with his step-mother. In some languages, there is a specific word for this. English uses the word “incest.” However, since Paul uses a general term and then brings up a specific situation, you also should use a general term for “sexual immorality” in this chapter. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fornication]])<br><br>### Judgment<br><br>Paul refers to “judgment” or “judging” in [5:3](../05/03.md), [12–13](../05/12.md). “Judging” refers to deciding whether someone is guilty or innocent. Paul emphasizes in this chapter that Christians should “judge” other Christians in the proper setting (see [5:3–5](../05/03.md)). However, they do not need to “judge” people who are not Christians. Paul states that “judging” them is God’s responsibility ([5:12–13](../05/12.md)). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]])<br><br>### Excommunication<br><br>In [5:2](../05/02.md), Paul speaks about “removing” the person who committed the sexual sin from among the Corinthians, and he makes a similar command in [5:13](../05/13.md). The phrase “hand this man over to Satan” in [5:5](../05/05.md) has a similar meaning. Finally, when Paul tells them to “clean out the old yeast” ([5:7](../05/07.md)), this is a metaphor for the same action. Paul is commanding the Corinthians to stop including in their group the man who committed the sexual sin. It is not totally clear whether the man can be accepted back into the group if he stops committing the sin.<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Euphemisms<br><br>As is the case in many cultures, sexual behavior is a delicate topic. Paul thus uses euphemisms to avoid sounding crude or nasty. When he says that “someone has his father’s wife” ([5:1](../05/01.md)), this is a delicate way to refer to someone consistently having sex with his father’s wife, whether married or not. He later on calls this behavior “a deed” ([5:2](../05/02.md)) or “such a thing” ([5:3](../05/03.md)). These phrases are ways of referring back to the man having sex with his father’s wife without using crude words. If your language has similar euphemisms for delicately referring to sexual behavior, you could use them here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])<br><br>### Passover metaphor<br><br>In [5:6–8](../05/06.md), Paul speaks of “yeast” and “Passover.” Passover was Jewish festival in which the people celebrated how God delivered them from serving as slaves in Egypt. The Israelites sacrificed lambs and spread the blood on their doors, and they ate bread without yeast in it because they would have to leave quickly, before the bread could rise. Then, God sent a destroying angel who killed the firstborn child in every house that did not have blood on its door. When this happened, the ruler of Egypt told the Israelites to leave immediately. You can read about these events in [Exodus 12](../exo/12/01.md). Later generations of Israelites celebrated this day by removing the yeast from their houses and by sacrificing a lamb. Paul refers to this festival in these verses. He uses the festival of Passover as a metaphor to encourage the Corinthians to remove sinful people (“yeast”) from their group (“their house”). There is even a “Passover lamb,” who is Jesus himself. Since this metaphor is drawn from the Old Testament, you should preserve it in your translation. If necessary you can include a footnote that gives some extra information, or you could refer your readers to Exodus 12 if they have access to the book of Exodus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/yeast]], [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/passover]], and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>In [5:6](../05/06.md) and [5:12](../05/12.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>### Present in spirit<br><br>In [5:3–4](../05/03.md), Paul speaks of being with the Corinthians “in spirit.” While this could be a reference to the Holy Spirit, who would connect Paul with the Corinthians, more likely Paul is referring to his own “spirit,” which refers to the aspect of Paul that can connect with the Corinthians even when he is not physically present. When he says that he is with them “in spirit,” that means that he is thinking about them and that they should act as they would if Paul was physically present. You could either use a comparable idiom in your language or explain in some other way what “spirit” means in these verses. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Structure of 5:3–5<br><br>In [5:3–5](../05/03.md), Paul uses a long and complicated sentence structure. In 5:3, he describes how he has “passed judgment” as if he were present. In 5:5, he tells them what the response to that judgment should be: “hand this man over to Satan.” In 5:4, then, he describes the situation in which they should hand the man over: they should be gathered together and acting with the authority of both Paul and Jesus. Finally, in 5:4, “in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ” could describe how Paul has “passed judgment” in 5:3, or it could describe how the Corinthians have “assembled” in 5:4. In order to translate these verses clearly, you may need to rearrange some clauses or add explanatory information that clarifies what Paul is saying. For more details and translation options, see the notes on those verses.<br><br>### Structure of 5:12–13<br><br>In [5:12–13](../05/13.md), Paul alternates between talking about judging “those outside” and “those inside.” If alternating between these two ideas would be confusing in your language, you could rearrange the clauses so that the verses deal with “those outside” first and then “those inside.” Here is an example of how you could do this: “For what to me to judge those outside? God will judge those outside. But do you not judge those inside? “Remove the evil from among yourselves.”
564	1CO	5	1	k55t	translate-unknown	ὅλως ἀκούεται	1		Here, **actually** could: (1) emphasize that something is really true. Alternate translation: “It is really reported that” (2) emphasize that many people know about what is going on in the Corinthian church. Alternate translation: “It is everywhere reported that” or “It is reported by many people that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
565	1CO	5	1	wrj1	figs-activepassive	ὅλως ἀκούεται	1		Here Paul intentionally uses a passive form to avoid stating who told him about the **sexual immorality**. If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea by making Paul the subject of a verb such as “learn” or by using a form that avoids naming a person. Alternate translation: “Some people have actually reported to me that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
566	1CO	5	1	dlj2	figs-doublet	ἐν ὑμῖν πορνεία, καὶ τοιαύτη πορνεία ἥτις οὐδὲ ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1	which does not even exist among the Gentiles	Here Paul repeats **sexual immorality** in order to emphasize how shocked and upset he is that people among the Corinthians are committing sexual sins. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine these two statements and express Paul’s shock in another way. Alternate translation: “{there is} sexual immorality among you that even the Gentiles condemn” or “you overlook flagrant sexual immorality, a kind which even the Gentiles do not accept” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
567	1CO	5	1	bnnc	figs-explicit	ἥτις οὐδὲ ἐν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		While Paul does not explicitly say why this **immorality** is not **among the Gentiles**, the Corinthians would have understood him to mean that the **Gentiles** do not permit such behavior and prohibit it by law or social practice. If this information would not be implied in your language, you could include a word or phrase that indicates that Paul refers to the attitude of **Gentiles** towards this kind of **sexual immorality**. Alternate translation: “which even the Gentiles avoid” or “which even the Gentiles find shocking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
568	1CO	5	1	q8p7	translate-unknown	τοῖς ἔθνεσιν	1		Here Paul does not use **the Gentiles** primarily to refer to non-Jews, since there were non-Jewish members of the church. Rather, Paul uses **the Gentiles** to describe anyone who does not worship the true God. If your readers would misunderstand **the Gentiles**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies those who do not worship or serve God. Alternate translation: “the pagans” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
569	1CO	5	1	b9xn		γυναῖκά τινα τοῦ πατρὸς ἔχειν	1	a man has his father’s wife	In Paul’s culture, if man **has** a woman, it refers to a long-term sexual relationship. Often this would be a marriage, but it could also be a sexual relationship without marriage. Here, it is not clear whether the person (**someone**) marries **his father’s wife** or not. What is clear is that he is in a long-term sexual relationship with **his father’s wife**. If possible use a word or phrase that indicates this kind of general relationship. Alternate translation: “someone is living with his father’s wife” or “someone is sleeping with his father’s wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
570	1CO	5	1	lxp1	translate-kinship	γυναῖκά…τοῦ πατρὸς	1	father’s wife	Here, **his father’s wife** identifies a woman who is married to a man’s father but who is not the man’s mother. If your language has a specific word for this relationship, you could use it here. If your language does not have a word for this relationship, you could describe the relationship with a phrase, much like the ULT does. Alternate translation: “his father’s wife who is not his mother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
571	1CO	5	2	idwe	figs-activepassive	ὑμεῖς πεφυσιωμένοι ἐστέ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that **you** “puff” yourselves up. Alternate translation: “you puff yourselves up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
572	1CO	5	2	uwco	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα ἀρθῇ…ὁ, τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο ποιήσας	1		Here, **so that** could introduce: (1) a purpose for the “mourning.” Alternate translation: “in order that the one who did this deed might be removed (2) a command. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “The one who did this deed should be removed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
573	1CO	5	2	rr93	figs-activepassive	ἵνα ἀρθῇ ἐκ μέσου ὑμῶν ὁ, τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο ποιήσας	1	The one who did this must be removed from among you	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **removed** rather than the people doing the “removing.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “you” do it. Alternate translation: “so that you remove the one who did this deed from among you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
574	1CO	5	2	ffwt	figs-doublet	ὁ, τὸ ἔργον τοῦτο ποιήσας	1		In Paul’s culture, it was normal to use both **did** and **deed** to refer to performing an act. If your language would not use both **did** and **deed** here, you could express the idea with just one of these two words. Alternate translation: “the one who did this” or “the one who carried out this deed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
575	1CO	5	2	qwja	figs-idiom	ἀρθῇ ἐκ μέσου ὑμῶν	1		When someone is **removed from among** a group, it means that he or she is no longer part of the group. If your language has a specific word or phrase to describe expelling a member of a group, you could use it here. Alternate translation: “might be banned from your group” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
576	1CO	5	3	rm6l	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		Here, the word **For** introduces the reason why the man who has committed the sexual sin should be “removed from among you” ([5:2](../05/02.md)). The reason is because Paul has already **passed judgment** on him, and so the Corinthians should be enacting the punishment. Use a word or phrase in your language that introduces a reason. Alternate translation: “He should be removed since” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
577	1CO	5	3	u5a2	figs-idiom	ἀπὼν τῷ σώματι	1		In Paul’s culture, **being absent in body** is a figurative way to speak about not being present in person. If your readers would misunderstand **being absent in the body**, you could use a comparable expression or translate the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “not being there with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
578	1CO	5	3	xm4e	figs-idiom	παρὼν…τῷ πνεύματι	1	I am present in spirit	In Paul’s culture, **being present in spirit** is a figurative way to speak of thinking about and caring about that person. If your readers would misunderstand **being present in spirit**, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “still being connected to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
579	1CO	5	3	gfep		τῷ πνεύματι	1		Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) Paul’s **spirit**, which would be the part of him that connects with the Corinthians across a distance. Alternate translation: “in my spirit” (2) the Holy Spirit, which connects Paul with the Corinthians, even though they are not physically together. Alternate translation: “in God’s Spirit” or “by the power of God’s Spirit”
580	1CO	5	3	ax3u		ἤδη κέκρικα…τὸν οὕτως τοῦτο κατεργασάμενον	1	I have already passed judgment on the one who did this	Here Paul has **already passed judgment**, which means that he has declared the man to be guilty. Two verses later ([5:4](../05/04.md)), Paul specifies what the punishment that results from the **judgment** should be: the man should be “handed over to Satan.” Here, then, use a word or phrase that indicates a decision about guilt, not a punishment. Alternate translation: “have already judged the one who did such a thing to be guilty”
581	1CO	5	3	sac6	figs-abstractnouns	ἤδη κέκρικα	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **judgment**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “judge” instead of **passed judgment on**. Alternate translation: “have already judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
582	1CO	5	3	v4o9	figs-euphemism	τὸν οὕτως τοῦτο κατεργασάμενον	1		Paul does not wish to repeat the ugly details of the man having sex with his stepmother. Instead, he uses general words to refer back to what he has already said about the man. If possible, preserve how Paul avoids repeating the details of the sin in your translation. You could use vague language like Paul does, or you could use a similar euphemism. Alternate translation: “the man who committed this sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
583	1CO	5	3	g8b6	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ὡς παρὼν	1		Here Paul makes a conditional statement that might sound hypothetical but that he knows is not true. He knows that he is not present with them, but he wants to emphasize that his **judgment** is just as effective **as if** he were **present**. Use a natural form in your language for introducing a condition that the speaker believes is not true. Alternate translation: “even though I am absent” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
584	1CO	5	4	xc3z	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	συναχθέντων ὑμῶν καὶ τοῦ ἐμοῦ πνεύματος	1		The phrase **You and my spirit, having been assembled** gives the time and situation in which the Corinthians should “hand this man over to Satan” ([5:5](../05/05.md)). If this phrase would not indicate timing or a situation in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does indicate time or situation. Alternate translation: “One of the times when you and my spirit have been assembled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
585	1CO	5	4	m9yz	figs-activepassive	συναχθέντων	1	When you are assembled	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the things that are **assembled** rather than what does the “assembling.” You could express the idea in active form by using a verb such as “gather together” or “meet.” Alternate translation: “meeting together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
586	1CO	5	4	t83d	figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	in the name of our Lord Jesus	Acting **in the name of** a person means representing that person. Representatives, those who do anything **in the name of** someone else, act with the authority of the people they represent. If your readers would misunderstand **in the name of**, you could use a comparable idiom for representing someone or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “as representatives of our Lord Jesus Christ” or “as people who act for our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
587	1CO	5	4	fznv	figs-infostructure	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ, συναχθέντων ὑμῶν καὶ τοῦ ἐμοῦ πνεύματος,	1		The phrase **in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ** could modify: (1) how Paul has “passed judgment” in [5:3](../05/03.md). Alternate translation: “I passed this judgment in the name of our Lord Jesus Christ. You and my spirit, having been assembled,” (2) how they have **been assembled**. See ULT. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
588	1CO	5	4	rhdc	figs-idiom	καὶ τοῦ ἐμοῦ πνεύματος	1		Just as in [5:3](../05/03.md), Paul speaks of his “spirit.” Just as there, Paul’s **spirit** being **assembled** with them is a figurative way to speak of how Paul thinks about and cares about them. Here, it has the additional implication that what they do when **assembled** carries Paul’s own authority. If your readers would misunderstand **my spirit**, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “and my thoughts” or “with my authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
589	1CO	5	4	ku2d		τοῦ ἐμοῦ πνεύματος	1		Here, **my spirit** could refer to: (1) Paul’s **spirit**, which would be the part of him that connects with the Corinthians across a distance. Alternate translation: “my own spirit” (2) the Holy Spirit, which connects Paul with the Corinthians, even though they are not physically together. Alternate translation: “my share of God’s Spirit” or “I, by the power of God’s Spirit”
590	1CO	5	4	jz43	figs-abstractnouns	σὺν τῇ δυνάμει τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν Ἰησοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **power**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “empower” or “authorize.” Alternate translation: “as people who are empowered by our Lord Jesus” or “as people whom our Lord Jesus has empowered” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
591	1CO	5	5	pqbs	figs-infostructure	παραδοῦναι τὸν τοιοῦτον	1		The phrase **hand this man over** identifies the punishment that goes with the verdict that Paul reached when he “judged” him ([5:3](../05/03.md)). If possible, express **hand this man over** as the result or the implication of Paul having “already judged” him. Alternate translation: “since I have declared this man guilty, hand him over” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
592	1CO	5	5	xcf6	figs-metaphor	παραδοῦναι τὸν τοιοῦτον τῷ Σατανᾷ	1	hand this man over to Satan	The phrase **hand** someone **over to** someone else refers to transferring a person from one authority to another. Here, then, Paul wants the Corinthians to transfer **this man** from under the authority of the church to under the authority of **Satan**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea with a comparable idiom or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “turn this man over to Satan” or “put this man under Satan’s authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
593	1CO	5	5	xmig	grammar-connect-logic-result	εἰς ὄλεθρον τῆς σαρκός	1		Here, **for** introduces the result of “handing this man over to Satan.” If **for** would not indicate result in your language, use a word or phrase that does introduce a result. Alternate translation: “with the result that his flesh is destroyed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
594	1CO	5	5	nq4y	translate-unknown	εἰς ὄλεθρον τῆς σαρκός	1	for the destruction of the flesh	This phrase could be a reference to the **destruction** of: (1) the parts of the **man** that are weak and sinful, which would indicate cleansing or sanctification. Alternate translation: “so that he will not continue to live sinfully” (2) the man’s physical body, which would mean either by physical suffering or death. Alternate translation: “so that he suffers in his body” or “for the death of his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
595	1CO	5	5	jg1u	figs-possession	ὄλεθρον τῆς σαρκός	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to clarify that **destruction** will happen to **the flesh**. If your language does not use this form to express that idea, you could translate **destruction** with a verb such as “destroy.” Alternate translation: “destroying the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
596	1CO	5	5	nqn8	figs-abstractnouns	εἰς ὄλεθρον τῆς σαρκός	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **destruction**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “destroy.” Alternate translation: “to destroy the flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
597	1CO	5	5	tit6	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		While **for the destruction of the flesh** is the result of the “handing over,” the words **so that** introduce the purpose of the “handing over.” Use a word or phrase in your language that introduces a purpose. Alternate translation: “in order that” or “with the goal that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
598	1CO	5	5	z2cl	figs-activepassive	τὸ πνεῦμα σωθῇ	1	so that his spirit may be saved on the day of the Lord	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **saved** rather than focusing on the person doing the “saving.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God may save his spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
599	1CO	5	5	eibc	translate-unknown	τὸ πνεῦμα	1		Here, **spirit** refers to the parts of **this man** that are not **flesh**. Therefore, the **spirit** is not just the non-physical part of the person but rather a reference to the whole person apart from his or her sins and weaknesses. If your readers would misunderstand that meaning of **spirit**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to the salvation of the whole person. Alternate translation: “he” or “his soul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
600	1CO	5	5	ny5b	figs-explicit	ἐν τῇ ἡμέρᾳ τοῦ Κυρίου	1		Here Paul uses the words translated **day of the Lord** in the same way the Old Testament uses them: to refer to an event in which God saves his people and punishes his enemies. Paul specifically refers to the event in which Jesus returns to judge everyone. If your readers would misunderstand that meaning of **day of the Lord**, you could include more words that clarify what Paul means by **day**. Alternate translation: “on the day when the Lord returns” or “when the Lord comes to judge everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
601	1CO	5	6	h2hk		οὐ καλὸν τὸ καύχημα ὑμῶν	1	Your boasting is not good	Alternate translation: “Your boasting is bad”
602	1CO	5	6	mucf	figs-explicit	μικρὰ ζύμη, ὅλον τὸ φύραμα ζυμοῖ	1		In [5:6–8](../05/6.md), Paul speaks about **yeast** and “dough.” Verses 7–8 clarify that Paul is thinking about the “Passover.” In this Jewish festival, people would remove all the **yeast** from their houses and only bake dough that was not fermented (“unleavened bread”). See [Exodus 12:1–28](../exo/12/01.md). In this verse, then, the **yeast** does not represent a good thing. Rather, it is supposed to be removed from the house, but any **yeast** that is left will still “leaven” a whole loaf. If your language would not consider **yeast** to be a bad thing when mixed into dough, you could include a word or phrase that indicates that the **yeast** is not wanted in the dough. Alternate translation: “a little yeast leavens a whole loaf that is meant to be unleavened” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
603	1CO	5	6	n9w0	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι μικρὰ ζύμη, ὅλον τὸ φύραμα ζυμοῖ?	1		Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information or for agreement or disagreement. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing by reminding them of something that they should already know. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “You know that a little yeast leavens the whole loaf” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
604	1CO	5	6	ng4m	figs-exmetaphor	μικρὰ ζύμη, ὅλον τὸ φύραμα ζυμοῖ	1	Do you not know that a little yeast leavens the whole loaf?	Here, **yeast** refers to anything that is added to bread dough to make it ferment and rise. This could be **yeast** itself or dough that is already fermented (“leaven”). Paul here uses this metaphor to indicate that, just like even a little bit of **yeast** will “leaven” **the whole loaf**, so a little bit of sin, or one person who sins, will affect the whole church. Therefore, the Corinthians believers should not “boast,” since the one person who is sinning among them denigrates the whole church. Since this metaphor is based on material from the Old Testament, you should try to preserve the form in your language. You could use a simile, or if necessary, you could use a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “sin is like yeast: a little yeast leavens the whole loaf” or “one bad apple spoils the whole barrel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
605	1CO	5	7	b8fi	figs-explicit	ἐκκαθάρατε τὴν παλαιὰν ζύμην, ἵνα ἦτε νέον φύραμα, καθώς ἐστε ἄζυμοι. καὶ γὰρ τὸ Πάσχα ἡμῶν ἐτύθη, Χριστός	1		Just as in [5:6](../05/06.md) and [5:8](../05/08.md), Paul is thinking about the Jewish festival of **Passover**. During this festival, people would remove all the **yeast** from their houses and only bake **unleavened bread**, that is, bread that is not fermented. Additionally, a **lamb** would be sacrificed and eaten. The **lamb** would remind the people about how God had delivered them from slavery in the land of Egypt. See [Exodus 12:1–28](../exo/12/01.md). If your readers would not infer this information, you could include a footnote that explains **Passover** and how it relates to **yeast** and a **Lamb**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
606	1CO	5	7	mpra	figs-exmetaphor	ἐκκαθάρατε τὴν παλαιὰν ζύμην, ἵνα ἦτε νέον φύραμα, καθώς ἐστε ἄζυμοι	1		Here Paul speaks about how Jews would **clean out the old yeast** during the festival of Passover and only bake **unleavened bread**. Just like in [5:6](../05/06.md), he compares sin to **yeast**. By speaking in this way, he urges the Corinthians to **clean out** the person who is sinning. Then, they will be like **new dough**, like **unleavened bread**, that is, without sin. Since this metaphor is based on material from the Old Testament, you should try to preserve the form in your language. You could use a simile, or if necessary, you could use a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “Clean out the old yeast, that is, sin, so that you may be new dough, just as you are unleavened bread” or “Clean out the bad apple so that you may be a fresh barrel, just as you are fresh apples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
607	1CO	5	7	z7vq	translate-unknown	καθώς ἐστε ἄζυμοι	1		When Paul says that they **are unleavened bread**, this means that they are in danger of encountering the **yeast**, that is, sin. This is why they must **clean out the old yeast**. If they remain **unleavened** by avoiding contact with **old yeast**, they will be **new dough**. If your readers would misunderstand **you are unleavened bread**, you could clarify that Paul calls them this because it shows that **yeast** is a threat to them. Alternate translation: “for you are currently unleavened bread” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
608	1CO	5	7	x3pt	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here Paul introduces the reason why his metaphor about **yeast** is appropriate. **Christ** is like the **Passover lamb**. Since Christ has **been sacrificed** like that **lamb**, the Corinthians are supposed to live as if it is **Passover**. This means avoiding sin in their group. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could make it more explicit. Alternate translation: “You should act like people observing Passover because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
609	1CO	5	7	ret3	figs-explicit	καὶ…τὸ Πάσχα ἡμῶν ἐτύθη, Χριστός	1	Christ, our Passover lamb, has been sacrificed	When God delivered the Jewish people from Egypt, he required them to sacrifice a lamb and spread its blood on their doors. God did not harm anyone who had the blood on their door, but the firstborn son of anyone who did not have the blood on their door died. Because of this, the **lamb** that was sacrificed at **Passover** represented God delivering the Jewish people by accepting the **lamb**’s death in place of the firstborn son. See [Exodus 12:1–28](../exo/12/01.md). The implication here is that **Christ**’s death also functioned in this way, in place of those whom he delivers. If your readers would misunderstand this implication, you could add a footnote explaining the function of the **lamb** at **Passover**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
610	1CO	5	7	qhrz	figs-exmetaphor	καὶ…τὸ Πάσχα ἡμῶν ἐτύθη, Χριστός	1		Here Paul compares **Christ** to the **Passover lamb**, since both died to save someone else. Since this metaphor is based on material from the Old Testament, you should try to preserve the form in your language, or you could use a simile. Alternate translation: “Christ, who is like our Passover lamb, has also been sacrificed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
611	1CO	5	7	yzjl	figs-activepassive	καὶ…τὸ Πάσχα ἡμῶν ἐτύθη, Χριστός	1		Paul intentionally does not state who **sacrificed** the **Passover lamb**, who is **Christ**. If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in another way. If possible, do not state who **sacrificed** **Christ**. Alternate translation: “Christ, our Passover lamb, has also died as a sacrifice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
612	1CO	5	8	ouhj	figs-explicit	ὥστε ἑορτάζωμεν, μὴ ἐν ζύμῃ παλαιᾷ, μηδὲ ἐν ζύμῃ κακίας καὶ πονηρίας, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀζύμοις εἰλικρινείας καὶ ἀληθείας.	1		Just as in [5:6–7](../05/6.md), here Paul speaks about **yeast** and “dough.” In this Jewish **festival** of Passover, people would remove all the **yeast** from their houses and only bake dough that was not fermented (**unleavened bread**). See [Exodus 12:1–28](../exo/12/01.md). Here, then, the **yeast** is what is meant to be removed, and the **unleavened bread** is what is meant to be eaten. If your readers would not understand this background, you could include a footnote that gives extra information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
613	1CO	5	8	donb	figs-exmetaphor	ὥστε ἑορτάζωμεν, μὴ ἐν ζύμῃ παλαιᾷ, μηδὲ ἐν ζύμῃ κακίας καὶ πονηρίας, ἀλλ’ ἐν ἀζύμοις εἰλικρινείας καὶ ἀληθείας.	1		Here Paul finishes the metaphor about **yeast** and Passover that he began in [5:6](../06/06.md). Paul encourages the Corinthians to **celebrate the festival** by getting rid of the **old yeast**. He then identifies that the **yeast** stands for **evil and wickedness**, while the **unleavened bread** that they are supposed to eat stands for **sincerity and truth**. With this metaphor Paul exhorts the Corinthians to expel from their group the man who has sinned, just as one would remove yeast from one’s house during the **festival**. Since this metaphor is based on material from the Old Testament, you should try to preserve the form in your language. You could use a simile, or you could include a footnote that explains the metaphor. Alternate translation: “So then, we should be like those who celebrate the festival, not with old yeast, nor with yeast of evil and wickedness, but with unleavened bread of sincerity and truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exmetaphor]])
614	1CO	5	8	hoew	figs-explicit	ἑορτάζωμεν	1		Because of what Paul has said in [5:7](../05/7.md), this **festival** must be the festival connected with Passover. If your readers would not understand this from the context, you could include the name “Passover” here. Alternate translation: “we might celebrate the Passover festival” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
615	1CO	5	8	ph92	figs-doublet	μὴ ἐν ζύμῃ παλαιᾷ, μηδὲ ἐν ζύμῃ κακίας καὶ πονηρίας	1		Here Paul repeats **yeast** in order to define what he means by **old yeast**. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could combine the two phrases and introduce the definition in another way. Alternate translation: “not with old yeast, which is evil and wickedness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
616	1CO	5	8	xvx4	figs-possession	ζύμῃ κακίας καὶ πονηρίας	1		Here Paul uses the possessive from to identify the **yeast** as **evil and wickedness**. If your language does not use this form for that idea, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that renames or identifies something. Alternate translation: “yeast, that is, evil and wickedness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
617	1CO	5	8	fo1r	figs-abstractnouns	κακίας καὶ πονηρίας	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **evil** and **wickedness**, you could express the ideas by using adjectives that describe actions or “behavior.” Alternate translation: “of evil and wicked behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
618	1CO	5	8	ymus	figs-doublet	κακίας καὶ πονηρίας	1		Here, the words **evil** and **wickedness** mean almost the same thing. The word **evil** refers to something that is morally “bad,” while the word **wickedness** refers to something that is characterized by vice. If your language does not have two words that are this similar, you could express the idea with one word. Alternate translation: “of evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
619	1CO	5	8	viwj	figs-possession	ἀζύμοις εἰλικρινείας καὶ ἀληθείας	1		Here Paul uses the possessive from to identify the **unleavened bread** as **sincerity and truth**. If your language does not use this form for that idea, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that renames or identifies something. Alternate translation: “unleavened bread, that is, sincerity and truth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
620	1CO	5	8	olbn	figs-abstractnouns	εἰλικρινείας καὶ ἀληθείας	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **sincerity** and **truth**, you could express the ideas by using adjectives that describe actions or behaviors. Alternate translation: “of sincere and true behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
621	1CO	5	8	mybu	translate-unknown	εἰλικρινείας	1		The word **sincerity** identifies actions done with only one intention, done without deceit. The people doing those actions do not say or pretend one thing while doing something else. If your readers would misunderstand this word, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that identifies someone who acts honestly and with one goal in mind. Alternate translation: “of integrity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
622	1CO	5	9	mcrl	figs-explicit	ἔγραψα ὑμῖν ἐν τῇ ἐπιστολῇ	1		Here Paul refers to a letter that he wrote and sent to the Corinthians before he began this letter. The phrase does not refer to this letter but to a previous letter. If your readers would misunderstand **I wrote to you in my letter**, you could include a word that clarifies that **the letter** is one that Paul has already sent. Alternate translation: “I already wrote to you in my previous letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
623	1CO	5	9	le8i	translate-unknown	συναναμίγνυσθαι	1		Here, **to associate with** often refers to two groups of people meeting together. The idea here is that **sexually immoral people** should not be a part of the Corinthians’ group. If **to associate with** does not have this meaning in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that refers to including people in one’s group. Alternate translation: “to consistently meet with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
624	1CO	5	10	vkid	grammar-connect-words-phrases	οὐ πάντως	1		Paul uses **by no means** to strongly introduce a clarification about what he wrote to them previously ([5:9](../05/09.md)). When he told them “not to associate with sexually immoral people,” he did not mean **people of this world**. Rather, as the next verse clarifies, he meant fellow believers. If your readers would misunderstand **by no means**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a qualification to a previous statement. Alternate translation: “not that you should not associate at all with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
625	1CO	5	10	pgwb	translate-unknown	τοῦ κόσμου τούτου	1		The phrase **of this world** clarifies that the **immoral people** are not part of the church. If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could use a comparable phrase that identifies the **immoral people** as unbelievers. Alternate translation: “who do not believe” or “who are not part of the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
626	1CO	5	10	grud	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς πλεονέκταις	1		Paul is using the adjective **greedy** as a noun in order to identify a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “greedy people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
627	1CO	5	10	taf5	translate-unknown	ἅρπαξιν	1	the greedy	Here, **swindlers** identifies people who take money from others dishonestly. If your readers would misunderstand **swindlers**, you could use a word that refers to such people. Alternate translation: “thieves” or “embezzlers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
628	1CO	5	10	m59j	grammar-connect-condition-contrary	ἐπεὶ ὠφείλετε ἄρα ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ἐξελθεῖν	1	you would need to go out of the world	Here Paul draws the logical conclusion about what he did not mean in his letter. Thus, while Paul does not think that the basis for the exhortation is true, he does think that this is the logical result of that basis. He gives this exhortation to show that it is absurd, since they cannot **go out from the world**. Therefore, the basis for this exhortation is also absurd. If **since then** in your language would not introduce a result from a reason that Paul thinks is not true, you could use a word or phrase that would introduce such an idea. Alternate translation: “If that was what I had meant, then you would need to go out from the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
629	1CO	5	10	egcx	translate-unknown	ἐκ τοῦ κόσμου ἐξελθεῖν	1		This phrase is not a euphemism for dying. Instead, Paul is saying that the Corinthians would need to travel off earth to get away from the **immoral people of this world**. In his culture and time, this was impossible. If your readers would misunderstand **go out from the world**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to traveling off earth. Alternate translation: “to leave earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
630	1CO	5	11	nys9		νῦν δὲ ἔγραψα ὑμῖν	1		Here Paul could be speaking about: (1) the letter he is writing **now**, in contrast to the letter he already wrote ([5:9](../05/09.md)). He uses the past tense **wrote** because the “writing” will be in the past when the letter is read to the Corinthians. Use the tense that would be appropriate in your language for this situation. Alternate translation: “But now I have written to you” (2) the letter he already wrote, but he wants them to understand it correctly **now**. Alternate translation: “But what I really wrote to you was”
631	1CO	5	11	mi6t	translate-unknown	συναναμίγνυσθαι	1		Here, **to associate with** often refers to two groups of people meeting together. The idea here is that **sexually immoral** people who claim to belong to the Corinthians’ group should not be considered part of the group. If **to associate with** does not have this meaning in your language, you could express the idea by using a word that refers to including people in one’s group. Alternate translation: “to consistently meet with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
632	1CO	5	11	cyrp	figs-distinguish	ἐάν τις ἀδελφὸς ὀνομαζόμενος	1		Here, **who is called a brother** distinguishes **anyone** from the people mentioned in the last verse. Paul did not require the Corinthians **not to associate** with those people, but he does require them **not to associate** with any such person **who is called a brother**. Use a construction in your language that indicates that Paul is distinguishing, not informing. Alternate translation: “any person called a brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
633	1CO	5	11	w9w8	figs-activepassive	ὀνομαζόμενος	1	anyone who is called	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **called** rather than the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who does the action, you could use “you” or “the brother” as the subject. Alternate translation: “who calls himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
634	1CO	5	11	b4us	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφὸς	1	brother	Although **brother** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to a man or a woman. If your readers would misunderstand **brother**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “a brother or a sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
635	1CO	5	11	xob7	translate-unknown	λοίδορος	1		Here, **verbally abusive** describes someone who shows anger by using vicious words to attack others. Use a word in your language that describes this kind of person. Alternate translation: “vocally vicious” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
636	1CO	5	11	ypib	translate-unknown	ἅρπαξ	1		Here, **swindler** identifies a person who takes money from others dishonestly. If your readers would misunderstand **swindler**, you could use a word that refers to such people. Alternate translation: “a thief” or “an embezzler” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
637	1CO	5	11	fq7j	figs-explicit	τῷ τοιούτῳ μηδὲ συνεσθίειν	1		In Paul’s culture, to **eat with** someone meant that you accepted them into your social group. Here, he wants the Corinthians not to accept such people into their group. If “eating with” someone does not signify accepting them in your culture, you may need to make that idea explicit. Alternate translation: “Do not even include such a person in your group’s meals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
638	1CO	5	12	kj1x	grammar-connect-logic-result	γάρ	1		Here, **For** introduces further reasons why Paul wants the Corinthians to focus on “judging” fellow believers but not **those outside**. These reasons continue into the next verse ([5:13](../05/13.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could use a word or phrase that would introduce further reasons. Alternate translation: “Further,” or “For more proof,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
639	1CO	5	12	xeu7	figs-rquestion	τί…μοι τοὺς ἔξω κρίνειν?	1	how am I involved with judging those who are outside the church?	Here Paul asks **what to me to judge those outside**, but he is not really asking for information. Rather, the question assumes that the answer is “nothing” or “it does not matter to me,” and Paul uses the question to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negative statement. Alternate translation: “it is nothing to me to judge those outside” or “it is not my business to judge those outside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
640	1CO	5	12	jmxt	figs-ellipsis	τί…μοι	1		Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words such as “is it” or “does it matter” to complete the thought. Alternate translation: “what is it to me” or “what does it matter to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
641	1CO	5	12	n6on	figs-123person	μοι	1		Here Paul speaks of himself only, but he wants the Corinthians to have the same opinion that he has. If **to me** would cause your readers to misunderstand this point, you could include the Corinthians in this question as well. Alternate translation: “to us” or “to you and me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
642	1CO	5	12	ncl1	figs-idiom	τοὺς ἔξω…τοὺς ἔσω	1		The phrase **those outside** identifies people who do not belong to the group of believers in Corinth. The phrase **those inside** identifies the opposite: people who do belong to the group of believers in Corinth. If your readers would misunderstand these phrases, you could use words or phrases that refer to people who belong to and do not belong to a specific group. Alternate translation: “the outsiders … the insiders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
643	1CO	5	12	m4s6	figs-rquestion	οὐχὶ τοὺς ἔσω ὑμεῖς κρίνετε?	1	Are you not to judge those inside?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation or statement of obligation. Alternate translation: “But you should judge those inside” or “You do indeed judge those inside” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
644	1CO	5	13	m1d9	translate-textvariants	κρίνει	1		In Paul’s language, **judges** and “will judge” look and sound very similar. While some early and important manuscripts have “will judge” here, some early and important manuscripts have **judges**. Unless there is a good reason to translate “will judge,” it is best to follow the ULT here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
645	1CO	5	13	hvo1	figs-pastforfuture	κρίνει	1		Here, **judges** makes a general statement about what God does. The present tense does not mean that God is currently passing final judgment on **those outside** and will not do so in the future. Rather, Paul has the final judgment in mind. If your readers would misunderstand the present tense of **judges**, you could use the future tense here. Alternate translation: “will judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
646	1CO	5	13	z45o	figs-idiom	τοὺς…ἔξω	1		The phrase **those outside** identifies people who do not belong to the group of believers in Corinth. If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could use a word or phrase that refers to people who do not belong to a specific group. Alternate translation: “the outsiders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
647	1CO	5	13	kx9j	writing-quotations	ἐξάρατε τὸν πονηρὸν ἐξ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν	1		Here Paul quotes a command that appears many times in the Old Testament book named Deuteronomy (see [Deuteronomy 13:5](../../deu/13/05.md); [17:7](../../deu/17/07.md), [12](../../deu/17/12.md); [19:19](../../deu/19/19.md); [21:21](../../deu/21/21.md); [22:21–22](../../deu/22/21.md), [24](../../deu/22/24.md); [24:7](../../deu/24/07.md)). If your readers would not recognize this command as a quotation, you could introduce it in the same way that you have already introduced quotations from the Old Testament (see [1:31](../01/31.md)). Alternate translation: “As it can be read in the Old Testament, ‘Remove the evil from among yourselves’” or “According to the book of Deuteronomy, ‘Remove the evil from among yourselves’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
648	1CO	5	13	al7v	figs-quotations	ἐξάρατε τὸν πονηρὸν ἐξ ὑμῶν αὐτῶν	1		If you cannot use this form in your language, you could translate this command as an indirect quote instead of as a direct quote. Alternate translation: “The scripture says that you should remove the evil from among yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
649	1CO	5	13	h6ry	figs-nominaladj	τὸν πονηρὸν	1		Paul is using the adjective **evil** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are evil” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
650	1CO	6	intro	s6hb			0		# 1 Corinthians 6 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>3. Against sexual immorality (4:16–6:20)<br> * Against public lawsuits (6:1–8)<br> * Sins and salvation (6:9–11)<br> * Flee from sexual immorality (6:12–20)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### Lawsuits<br><br>In [6:1–8](../06/01.md), Paul speaks about believers taking other believers to court in lawsuits. Paul critiques them for taking their disputes before unbelievers rather than settling them within the church. By the end of the section, Paul says that lawsuits themselves are a “complete defeat” of believers. Paul’s point is that believers will judge angels and the world, so they are quite able to resolve disputes within the church. Therefore, believers should never take other believers to court. In this section, use words and language that describe legal matters in your language. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]])<br><br>### Sexual immorality<br><br>In [6:12–20](../06/12.md), Paul discusses “sexual immorality.” This phrase refers generally to any kind of improper sexual activity, and Paul does speak generally in this section. He mentions particularly having sex with prostitutes, but the commands he gives apply to all kinds of sexual activity. The Corinthians seemed to think that they could do whatever they wanted with their bodies, including having sex with anyone. Paul responds that their bodies are united to Christ, and any sexual activity they participate in needs to fit with their union with Christ. Use general words for improper sexual activity in this section. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/fornication]])<br><br>### Redemption<br><br>In [6:20](../06/20.md), Paul tells the Corinthians that they have been “bought with a price.” He does not state what the price is or whom God bought the Corinthians from. However, it is clear that Paul is speaking about what we call “redemption” here. Paul thinks of the Corinthians as slaves up for sale, and God buys them from their previous owner by paying a price. The previous owner can be understood as sin, death, and evil powers, while the price is Jesus the Son dying for believers. You should not include all these implications in your translation, but you should use words that can be interpreted in this way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/redeem]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### “Members” of Christ or of a prostitute<br><br>In [6:15–17](../06/15.md), Paul speaks of a person’s connection to Christ and to a prostitute with the language of “members” and “joining.” When he refers to “members,” he is speaking as if the believer were either a body part of Christ or a body part of a prostitute. He shows how bad it is to be “joined” with a prostitute by speaking as if someone cut a body part off of Christ and attached it to a prostitute instead. That is how closely a person is joined either to Christ or to a prostitute. If possible, preserve the body parts language here. (See: [[rc://*/tw/dict/bible/other/member]])<br><br>### Body as temple<br><br>In [6:19](../06/19.md), Paul speaks as if believers’ bodies are temples of the Holy Spirit. Sometimes he speaks as if the church as a whole is a temple, but here he means that individual believers are all temples. A temple is where a god is specially present, so Paul means that the Holy Spirit is specially present in believers’ bodies. If possible, preserve this metaphor, since it connects to themes throughout the entire Bible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>In [6:1–7](../06/01.md), [9](../06/09.md), [15–16](../06/15.md), [19](../06/19.md), Paul uses rhetorical questions. He is not asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to provide him with information. Rather, he is asking these questions because he wants the Corinthians to think about how they are acting and what they are thinking. The questions encourage them to think along with Paul. For ways to translate these questions, look for the notes on each verse that includes these kinds of questions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Words for homosexual behavior<br><br>In [6:9](../06/09.md), Paul refers to “male prostitutes” and “those who practice homosexuality.” In Paul’s culture, these words refer to both participants in homosexual activity. The words “male prostitutes” refers to those who are penetrated during sexual activity, while “those who practice homosexuality” refer to those who do the penetrating during sexual activity. If your culture has specific words to describe these things, you can use them here. If your culture does not have such specific words, you can use general phrases like the ULT does, or you could combine the two phrases into one phrase that identifies homosexual activity. <br><br>### Quoting the Corinthians<br><br>In [6:12–13](../06/12.md), Paul quotes words that the Corinthians have said or that they wrote to him. The ULT indicates these words by putting quotation marks around them. Use a natural way in your language to indicate that an author is quoting someone else. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
651	1CO	6	1	gmy5	figs-rquestion	τολμᾷ τις ὑμῶν, πρᾶγμα ἔχων πρὸς τὸν ἕτερον, κρίνεσθαι ἐπὶ τῶν ἀδίκων, καὶ οὐχὶ ἐπὶ τῶν ἁγίων?	1	does he dare to go … saints?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. Here, the truthful answer to the question is “they are, but they should not.” Paul asks the question to get the Corinthians to realize how bad going **to court before the unrighteous** is. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a “should” statement or a statement of fact. Alternate translation: “Some of you actually dare, having a dispute with another, to go to court before the unrighteous, and not before the saints.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
652	1CO	6	1	q5d3	translate-unknown	τολμᾷ	1	dispute	Here, **dare** refers to having confidence or boldness when one should not have confidence or boldness. Use a word or phrase in your language that indicates improper confidence. Alternate translation: “Do … have the audacity” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
653	1CO	6	1	qi57	grammar-connect-time-simultaneous	πρᾶγμα ἔχων πρὸς τὸν ἕτερον	1		The phrase **having a dispute with another** provides the situation in which they are going **to court**. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could make it explicit. Alternate translation: “if you have a dispute with another” or “whenever you have a dispute with another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-simultaneous]])
654	1CO	6	1	jsgt	figs-explicit	τὸν ἕτερον	1		Here, **another** identifies the other person as a fellow believer. If your readers would misunderstand **another**, you could add a word or phrase that identifies **another** as a believer. Alternate translation: “another believer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
655	1CO	6	1	umgg	figs-idiom	κρίνεσθαι ἐπὶ…ἐπὶ	1		The phrase **to go to court before** refers to settling a lawsuit or other legal dispute **before** a judge. If your readers would misunderstand **go to court before**, you could use a comparable idiom that refers to setting a dispute in a court of law. Alternate translation: “to resolve your lawsuit in the presence of … in the presence of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
656	1CO	6	2	r8sj	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1		The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul speaks about in [6:1](../06/01.md). The Corinthians currently think that going to court in public is fine. Paul gives the true alternative: they **will judge the world** and thus should not need to take their quarrels and lawsuits anywhere else. If your readers would misunderstand **Or**, you could use a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
657	1CO	6	2	i1m5	figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι οἱ ἅγιοι τὸν κόσμον κρινοῦσιν?	1	Or do you not know that the believers will judge the world?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “You already know that the saints will judge the world.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
658	1CO	6	2	i67f	figs-rquestion	ἀνάξιοί ἐστε κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων?	1	If then, you will judge the world, are you not able to settle matters of little importance?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negative or positive statement. Alternate translation: “you are definitely not unworthy of the smallest cases” or “you are definitely worthy of the smallest cases (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
659	1CO	6	2	py6h	grammar-connect-condition-fact	εἰ ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος	1		Paul is speaking as if **the world is judged by you** was a hypothetical possibility, but he means that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if it is certain or true, and if your readers might misunderstand and think that what Paul is saying is not certain, then you can translate his words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “because the world is judged by you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
660	1CO	6	2	yq8e	figs-activepassive	ἐν ὑμῖν κρίνεται ὁ κόσμος	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **the world**, which is **judged**, rather than **you**, who do the “raising.” Alternate translation: “you judge the world” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
661	1CO	6	2	jqvf	figs-pastforfuture	κρίνεται	1		Here, **is judged** makes a general statement about what **you**, that is, the **saints**, do. The present tense does not mean that the **saints** are currently passing final judgment and will not do so in the future. Rather, Paul uses the present tense to state a general fact about the **saints**. The judgment itself will occur in the future. If your readers would misunderstand the present tense of **is judged**, you could use the future tense here. Alternate translation: “will be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pastforfuture]])
662	1CO	6	2	stvc	figs-idiom	ἀνάξιοί…κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων	1		Here, to be **unworthy of** something means that one is not capable of doing that thing or is not qualified to do it. If your readers would misunderstand **unworthy of**, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “unqualified concerning the smallest cases” “not able to judge the smallest cases” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
663	1CO	6	2	dmi6	translate-unknown	κριτηρίων ἐλαχίστων	1		Here, **cases** could refer to: (1) legal disputes that are resolved in a court of law. Alternate translation: “of the smallest legal disputes” (2) the court of law that decides the legal dispute. Alternate translation: “of the lowest courts of law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
664	1CO	6	3	us55	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ἀγγέλους κρινοῦμεν,	1	Do you not know that we will judge the angels?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you know that we will judge angels.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
665	1CO	6	3	x6h3	figs-rquestion	μήτι γε βιωτικά?	1	How much more, then, can we judge matters of this life?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the reader agrees. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “How much more the matters of this life!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
666	1CO	6	3	hxzn	figs-ellipsis	μήτι γε βιωτικά	1		Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words such as “can we judge” or “are we able to judge” to complete the thought. Alternate translation: “How much more can we judge the matters of this life” or “How much more are we able to judge the matters of this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
667	1CO	6	3	h3z0	grammar-connect-logic-result	μήτι γε	1		Here Paul’s argument assumes that judging **angels** is a greater and more difficult thing than judging **the matters of this life**. The phrase **How much more** implies that people who can do a great and difficult thing like judging **angels** can easily do a less impressive and easier thing like judging **the matters of this life**. If **How much more** does not express that connection in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does express that connection. Alternate translation: “If we can do that, can we not judge” or “Should it not be easy, then, to judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
668	1CO	6	3	h374	translate-unknown	βιωτικά	1	matters of this life	Here, **the matters of this life** refers to anything that is a part of people’s ordinary or daily lives. Paul uses the word to identify the lawsuits among the Corinthians as simply matters of ordinary life and insignificant in comparison with something like judging **angels**. If your readers would misunderstand **the matters of this life**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to features of daily or regular life. Alternate translation: “what happens in our daily lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
669	1CO	6	4	xn32	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	βιωτικὰ…κριτήρια ἐὰν ἔχητε	1	If then you have to make judgments that pertain to daily life	Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that they might **have legal disputes**, or they might not **have legal disputes**. He then specifies the result for if they do **have legal disputes**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or “when.” Alternate translation: “when you have legal disputes about things of this life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
670	1CO	6	4	v80t	translate-unknown	κριτήρια…ἔχητε	1		Here, **legal disputes** could refer to: (1) legal disputes that are resolved in a court of law. Alternate translation: “you have lawsuits” (2) the court of law that decides the legal dispute. Alternate translation: “you seek a judgment in a court of law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
671	1CO	6	4	cu0s	translate-unknown	βιωτικὰ	1		Here, **things of this life** refers to anything that is a part of people’s ordinary or daily lives. Paul uses the word to identify the lawsuits among the Corinthians as matters of ordinary life. If your readers would misunderstand **about things of this life**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to features of daily or regular life. Alternate translation: “about what happens in your daily lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
672	1CO	6	4	vw5t	figs-rquestion	τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ, τούτους καθίζετε?	1	If then you have to make judgments that pertain to daily life, why do you lay such cases as these before those who have no standing in the church?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “there is no good reason.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea as an emphatic statement or a command. Alternate translation: “do not appoint as judges those who are of no account in the church!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
673	1CO	6	4	e791	translate-unknown	τοὺς ἐξουθενημένους ἐν τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ	1	why do you lay such cases as these before those who have no standing in the church?	Here, those **who are of no account in the church** could be: (1) people who are not members of the church in Corinth. Alternate translation: “who do not believe” (2) people who are members of the church in Corinth but whom other believers do not respect. Alternate translation: “whom the fellow believers do not respect” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
674	1CO	6	5	dvq3	writing-pronouns	λέγω	1		The phrase **I say this** could refer: (1) to what Paul has already said, probably all of [6:1–4](../06/01.md). Alternate translation: “I say those things” (2) to what Paul is saying throughout this whole section ([6:1–8](../06/01.md)). Alternate translation: “I am saying these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
675	1CO	6	5	xnd7	figs-idiom	πρὸς ἐντροπὴν ὑμῖν	1		Here, **to your shame** means that the things that Paul has said should make the Corinthians feel **shame**. If your readers would misunderstand **to your shame**, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “to embarrass you” or “to make you feel ashamed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
676	1CO	6	5	ebh6	figs-abstractnouns	πρὸς ἐντροπὴν ὑμῖν λέγω	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **shame**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “shame.” Alternate translation: “I say this to shame you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
677	1CO	6	5	hk4q	figs-idiom	οὕτως οὐκ ἔνι…οὐδεὶς σοφὸς	1		The phrase **{Is it} thus {that} there is not any wise man** identifies a situation in which no **wise man** can be found. If your readers would misunderstand this phrase or find it confusing, you could use a comparable expression that identifies a situation in which there are no wise people. Alternate translation: “Is there not a wise man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
678	1CO	6	5	fue4	figs-rquestion	οὕτως οὐκ ἔνι ἐν ὑμῖν οὐδεὶς σοφὸς, ὃς δυνήσεται διακρῖναι ἀνὰ μέσον τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ αὐτοῦ?	1	Is there no one among you wise enough to settle a dispute between brothers?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing, specifically by making them feel ashamed. The question assumes that the answer is “there should be.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a “should” statement or introduce a statement with “surely.” Alternate translation: “You should have a wise man among you who will be able to discern between his brothers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
679	1CO	6	5	xma9	figs-gendernotations	οὐκ ἔνι…σοφὸς…αὐτοῦ	1		Although the words translated **wise man** and **his** are masculine, Paul is using them to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand these masculine words, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “there are not any wise people … their” or “there is not any wise man or woman … his or her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
680	1CO	6	5	l1hd	figs-gendernotations	τοῦ ἀδελφοῦ	1	brothers	Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
681	1CO	6	5	o28z	translate-unknown	διακρῖναι ἀνὰ μέσον	1		The phrase **to discern between** refers to making decisions about disputes between people. If your readers would misunderstand this phrase, you could express the idea with a word or phrase that refers to deciding which party is in the right in a dispute. Alternate translation: “to judge between” or “to settle disputes between” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
682	1CO	6	6	m7ls	figs-rquestion	ἀδελφὸς μετὰ ἀδελφοῦ κρίνεται, καὶ τοῦτο ἐπὶ ἀπίστων?	1	But brother goes to court against brother, and this before unbelievers!	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that there will be no verbal answer. Rather, the question is supposed to make the Corinthians feel ashamed. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a statement that expresses shock or condemnation. Alternate translation: “brother really goes to court against brother, and this before unbelievers!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
683	1CO	6	6	fyq8	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφὸς…ἀδελφοῦ	1		Although the words translated **brother** are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **brother**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “a brother or sister … a brother or sister” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
684	1CO	6	6	dv5g	figs-ellipsis	καὶ τοῦτο ἐπὶ ἀπίστων	1		In this clause, Paul has omitted some words that might be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If your language needs these words, you could include what action is happening. Alternate translation: “and they do this before unbelievers” or “and they go to court before unbelievers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
685	1CO	6	7	kvva	figs-infostructure	ἤδη μὲν οὖν ὅλως ἥττημα ὑμῖν ἐστιν, ὅτι κρίματα ἔχετε μεθ’ ἑαυτῶν	1		Here Paul gives the reason for the **defeat** after he mentions the **defeat**. If your language would state the reason first, you could reverse the order of these clauses. Alternate translation: “Therefore, since you have lawsuits among yourselves, this is indeed already a complete defeat for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
686	1CO	6	7	topu		ἤδη…ὅλως ἥττημα ὑμῖν	1		Here, **already** refers to how the Corinthians do not suffer **defeat** in the court of law but rather before that, when the lawsuit begins. If your readers would misunderstand **already**, you could clarify that the time in view is before the legal dispute is decided. Alternate translation: “a complete defeat for you even before you enter the court of law”
687	1CO	6	7	ugf7		ἤδη μὲν οὖν ὅλως ἥττημα ὑμῖν ἐστιν	1		Alternate translation: “Therefore, you are indeed already completely defeated”
688	1CO	6	7	lvc1	figs-metaphor	ὅλως ἥττημα	1		Here, **complete defeat** refers to total failure in attempting to accomplish some goal. The **defeat** does not require an opponent, since one can suffer **defeat** because of other obstacles. If your readers would misunderstand **complete defeat**, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “a total derailing” or “a total failure” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
689	1CO	6	7	tn9m	figs-rquestion	διὰ τί οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἀδικεῖσθε? διὰ τί οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἀποστερεῖσθε?	1	Why not rather suffer the wrong? Why not rather allow yourselves to be cheated?	Paul does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The questions assume that the reader agrees that it would be better to **be wronged** and **cheated**. If your readers would misunderstand these questions, you could express the ideas as emphatic comparisons. Alternate translation: “It would be better to be wronged! It would be better to be cheated!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
690	1CO	6	7	ruiy	figs-doublet	διὰ τί οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἀδικεῖσθε? διὰ τί οὐχὶ μᾶλλον ἀποστερεῖσθε?	1		Here Paul repeats his first question with almost exactly the same words. He does this to emphasize the point he is making. If your readers would misunderstand this repetition, you could combine the questions and express the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “Why not rather be wronged or cheated?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
691	1CO	6	7	i5n5	figs-activepassive	ἀδικεῖσθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **wronged** rather than the person doing the “wronging.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that a “fellow believer” does it. Alternate translation: “let a fellow believer wrong you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
692	1CO	6	7	vpy9	figs-activepassive	ἀποστερεῖσθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **cheated** rather than focusing on the person doing the “cheating.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that a “fellow believer” does it. Alternate translation: “let a fellow believer cheat you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
693	1CO	6	8	yfos	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἀλλὰ	1		Here, **But** introduces a contrast with what Paul wants them to do, which is to “be wronged” and “cheated” rather than take a fellow believer to court. Here Paul says that they do the exact opposite. Rather than “be wronged” and “cheated,” they actually **wrong** and **cheat** fellow believers. If your readers would misunderstand this connection, you could express the idea with a phrase that clarifies what Paul is contrasting. Alternate translation: “But instead of being wronged and cheated,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
694	1CO	6	8	ixb9	figs-ellipsis	καὶ τοῦτο ἀδελφούς	1		In this clause, Paul has omitted some words that might be necessary to make a complete thought in your language. If your language needs these words, you could include what action is happening. Alternate translation: “and you do this to your brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
695	1CO	6	8	kk7b	figs-gendernotations	ἀδελφούς	1	your own brothers	Although **brothers** is masculine, Paul is using this word to refer to any believer, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **brothers**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “to your brothers and sisters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
696	1CO	6	9	i2ln			0		In [6:9–10](../06/09.md), Paul lists people who do things that are unrighteous. Many of these words are the same words he used in the similar lists in [5:10–11](../05/10.md). It may be helpful to refer to how you translated the words there.
697	1CO	6	9	ojaf	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1		The word **Or** introduces Paul’s question as an alternative to “wronging and cheating brothers” in [6:7](../06/07.md). If they do indeed **know that the unrighteous will not inherit the kingdom of God**, they should not be “wronging and cheating brothers.” Paul uses the word **Or** to show that these two things are not compatible. If your readers would misunderstand **Or**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces an alternative. Alternate translation: “Against that,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
698	1CO	6	9	h17l	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ἄδικοι Θεοῦ Βασιλείαν οὐ κληρονομήσουσιν?	1	Or do you not know that	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, we know.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “surely you know that the unrighteous will not enter the kingdom of God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
699	1CO	6	9	slcx	figs-nominaladj	ἄδικοι	1		Paul is using the adjective **unrighteous** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are unrighteous” or “unrighteous people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
700	1CO	6	9	t1rt	figs-metaphor	οὐ κληρονομήσουσιν	1	will inherit	Here Paul speaks of the **kingdom of God** as if it were property that a parent could pass on to their child when the parent dies. Here, Paul uses the word **inherit** to refer to being able to live in the **kingdom of God**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “will not live in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
701	1CO	6	9	eywd	figs-activepassive	μὴ πλανᾶσθε	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **deceived** rather than on the person doing the “deceiving.” If you must state who does the action, you could use a vague or indefinite subject. Alternate translation: “Let no one deceive you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
702	1CO	6	9	vtlq	figs-nominaladj	πόρνοι	1		Paul is using the adjective phrase **sexually immoral** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are sexually immoral” or “sexually immoral people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
703	1CO	6	9	h2na	translate-unknown	οὔτε μαλακοὶ, οὔτε ἀρσενοκοῖται,	1	male prostitutes, those who practice homosexuality	The word translated **male prostitutes** identifies men who are penetrated during sexual acts with other men. The word translated **those who practice homosexuality** identifies men who penetrate other men during sexual acts. Your language may have specific words for these behaviors. If so, you could use them here. If your language does not have specific words for these behavior, you could either use descriptive phrases, or you could combine the two words and refer to homosexual activity in general. Alternate translation: “nor men who practice homosexuality” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
704	1CO	6	9	blc7	figs-abstractnouns	ἀρσενοκοῖται	1	male prostitutes	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **homosexuality**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “homosexual,” or you could use a descriptive phrase. Alternate translation: “those who are homosexual” or “those who have same-sex intercourse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
705	1CO	6	10	zzb5	figs-nominaladj	πλεονέκται	1		Paul is using the adjective **greedy** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “people who are greedy” or “greedy people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
706	1CO	6	10	bgj9	translate-unknown	λοίδοροι	1	the greedy	Here, **slanderers** is the same word that is translated “verbally abusive” in [5:11](../05/11.md). It describes someone who shows anger by using vicious words to attack others. Use a word in your language that describes this kind of person. Alternate translation: “vocally vicious people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
707	1CO	6	10	yzdx	translate-unknown	ἅρπαγες	1		Here, **swindlers** is the same word that is translated “swindler” in [5:11](../05/11.md). It identifies a person who takes money from others dishonestly. If your readers would misunderstand **swindlers**, you could use a word that refers to such people. Alternate translation: “embezzlers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
708	1CO	6	10	h6aa	figs-metaphor	κληρονομήσουσιν	1		Here Paul speaks of the **kingdom of God** as if it were property that a parent could pass on to their child when the parent dies. Here, Paul uses the word **inherit** to refer to being able to live in the **kingdom of God**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “will live in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
709	1CO	6	11	j49p	writing-pronouns	ταῦτά	1		Here, **that** refers to the list of unrighteous behaviors that Paul gave in [6:9–10](../06/09.md). Paul identifies **some** of the Corinthians as people who behaved in those ways. If your readers would misunderstand **that**, you could more clearly refer back to the list of unrighteous behaviors. Alternate translation: “those kinds of people {are what}” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
710	1CO	6	11	pxp6	figs-doublet	ἀλλὰ ἀπελούσασθε, ἀλλὰ ἡγιάσθητε, ἀλλὰ ἐδικαιώθητε	1		Here Paul repeats **but you were** in order to emphasize the contrast between what the Corinthians **were** and what they have now experienced. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could use **but you were** once and express the strong contrast in another way. Alternate translation: “But now you have been washed, sanctified, and justified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
711	1CO	6	11	v5yq	figs-activepassive	ἀπελούσασθε…ἡγιάσθητε…ἐδικαιώθητε	1	you have been cleansed	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on **you**, who are **washed**, **sanctified**, and **justified**, rather than the person doing the “washing,” “sanctifying,” and “justifying.” If you must state who does the actions, Paul implies that “God” does them. Alternate translation: “God washed you … God sanctified you … God justified you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
712	1CO	6	11	rri7	figs-metaphor	ἀπελούσασθε	1		Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians had been **washed** with water. By speaking in this way, Paul emphasizes that they have been cleansed from sin, just like washing with water cleanses a person from dirt. Paul may have baptism in mind. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “you were washed clean” or “you were purified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
713	1CO	6	11	s55x	figs-idiom	ἐν τῷ ὀνόματι τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ	1	in the name of the Lord Jesus Christ	When something is done **in the name of** a person, it is done with the authority or power of that person. Here the cleansing, sanctification, and justification are done with the authority or power of Jesus, since they are done **in the name of the Lord Jesus Christ**. If your readers would misunderstand **in the name of**, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “with the power of the Lord Jesus Christ” or “by the authority of the Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
714	1CO	6	11	gzrh	figs-possession	τῷ Πνεύματι τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν	1		Here Paul uses the possessive form to identify the **Spirit** as **our God**, that is, as the Holy Spirit. He does not mean that the **Spirit** is something that belongs to **our God**. If your language would not use that form to identify the **Spirit** as **our God**, you could use a word or phrase that does identify the **Spirit** as **our God** or the “Holy Spirit.” Alternate translation: “the Spirit who is our God” or “the Holy Spirit, our God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
715	1CO	6	12	c3bs	figs-doublet	πάντα μοι ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ οὐ πάντα συμφέρει. πάντα μοι ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’ οὐκ ἐγὼ ἐξουσιασθήσομαι ὑπό τινος.	1		Here Paul repeats **Everything is lawful for me** to make two separate comments on the statement. By repeating **Everything is lawful for me**, Paul emphasizes his qualifications or objections to this statement. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could state **Everything is lawful for me** once and include both comments after that. Alternate translation: ““Everything is lawful for me,’ but not everything is beneficial, and I will not be mastered by anything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
716	1CO	6	12	sw2e	writing-quotations	πάντα μοι ἔξεστιν, ἀλλ’	-1	Connecting Statement:	In this verse, Paul twice quotes what some people in the Corinthian church are saying. The ULT, by using quotation marks, indicates that these claims are quotations. If your readers would misunderstand **Everything is lawful for me** and think that Paul is claiming this, you could clarify that some of the Corinthians are saying this, and Paul is saying the words that occur after **but**. Alternate translation: “You say, ‘Everything is lawful for me,’ but I respond that … You say, ‘Everything is lawful for me,’ but I respond that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
717	1CO	6	12	r4mx	figs-explicit	πάντα	-1	Everything is lawful for me	Here, **everything** refers to any action or behavior that one might pursue. If your readers would misunderstand **everything**, you could clarify that Paul is referring to any action or behavior. Alternate translation: “Every behavior … every behavior … Every behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
718	1CO	6	12	y6kn	figs-explicit	συμφέρει	1		Here Paul does not say to whom **everything** is not **beneficial**. He means that **everything** is not **beneficial** to the person or people who say that **Everything is lawful** for them. If your language would include for whom **everything** is not **beneficial**, you could include a phrase such as “for you” here. Alternate translation: “is beneficial for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
719	1CO	6	12	c8vz	figs-activepassive	οὐκ ἐγὼ ἐξουσιασθήσομαι ὑπό τινος	1	I will not be mastered by any of them	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are not **mastered** rather than focusing on **anything**, which tries to do the “mastering.” Alternate translation: “nothing will master me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
720	1CO	6	12	p0d8	translate-unknown	οὐκ…ἐξουσιασθήσομαι ὑπό	1		Here, **be mastered** refers to being under the authority of something else. Paul here means that some things, when a person habitually does them, begin to have power or control over that person. Here, then, he wishes to tell the Corinthians that, while such things might be **lawful**, they should avoid doing these things because they will **be mastered** by these things. If your readers would misunderstand **be mastered**, you could express the idea by using words that refer to “power” or “control.” Alternate translation: “will not be controlled by” or “will not be under the power of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
721	1CO	6	13	jz55	writing-quotations	τὰ βρώματα τῇ κοιλίᾳ, καὶ ἡ κοιλία τοῖς βρώμασιν;…δὲ	1	“Food is for the stomach, and the stomach is for food,” but God will do away with both of them	In this verse, Paul quotes what some people in the Corinthian church are saying, just like he did in [6:12](../06/12.md). The ULT, by using quotation marks, indicates that this claim is a quotation. If your readers would misunderstand **Food {is} for the stomach, and the stomach for food** and think that Paul is claiming this, you could clarify that some of the Corinthians are saying this, and Paul is saying the words that occur after **but**. Alternate translation: “You say, ‘Food {is} for the stomach, and the stomach for food,’ but I respond that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
722	1CO	6	13	gt0n	figs-ellipsis	τὰ βρώματα τῇ κοιλίᾳ, καὶ ἡ κοιλία τοῖς βρώμασιν…τὸ…σῶμα οὐ τῇ πορνείᾳ, ἀλλὰ τῷ Κυρίῳ, καὶ ὁ Κύριος τῷ σώματι	1		In these two sentences, Paul omits **is** multiple times. If your language does not need to state **is** to express the idea, you could omit **is** throughout these two sentences. If your language does need to state **is** to express the idea, you could: (1) include **is** the first time it is needed in each sentence. See the ULT. (2) include **is** every time it is needed. Alternate translation: “Food {is} for the stomach, and the stomach {is} for food … the body {is} not for sexual immorality, but {is} for the Lord, and the Lord {is} for the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
723	1CO	6	13	uc1v	translate-unknown	καταργήσει	1	do away with	Here, **will do away with** refers to making something ineffective, useless, or irrelevant. What Paul means is that God will make **food** and **the stomach** unimportant and without function. If your readers would misunderstand **will do away with**, you could use a word or phrase that indicates that a God has acted so that **food** and **the stomach** are no longer important, useful, or effective. Alternate translation: “will render ineffective” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
724	1CO	6	13	scrh	writing-pronouns	καὶ ταύτην καὶ ταῦτα	1		Here, **this** refers to **stomach**, and **those** refers to **food**, since **food** is plural here. If your readers would misunderstand what **this** and **those** refer to, you could use the names **stomach** and **food** instead. Alternate translation: “both stomach and food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
725	1CO	6	13	pd10	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	2		Here, **Now** introduces a development based on what Paul has said about **food** and **the stomach**. While **food** is indeed **for the stomach**, the **body** is not **for sexual immorality**. Paul agrees with the Corinthians about **food** and **the stomach**, but he disagrees that **sexual immorality** and **the body** should be understood in the same way. Instead, **the body** exists **for the Lord**. Paul further explains in the next verse ([6:14](../06/14.md)) that, unlike **food** and **the stomach**, God will not **do away with** the **body**, since we will be resurrected. If **Now** would not introduce a difference between **the stomach** and **the body**, you could use a word or phrase that does introduce such a contrast. Alternate translation: “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
726	1CO	6	13	r1co	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ πορνείᾳ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **immorality**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “immoral.” Alternate translation: “for what is sexually immoral” or “sexually immoral behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
727	1CO	6	13	d9q7	figs-explicit	τῷ Κυρίῳ	1		Here Paul means that the **body** is meant to serve and please **the Lord**. If your readers would misunderstand **for the Lord**, you could include a verbal phrase that indicates that the **body** should serve **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “it is intended to please the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
728	1CO	6	13	zpx9	figs-explicit	ὁ Κύριος τῷ σώματι	1		Here, **the Lord for the body** could express the idea that: (1) the **Lord** works for the human **body** and not just the human “soul” or non-physical part. Alternate translation: “the Lord works for the body” (2) the **Lord** is human now and in a **body**, which would explain why Paul speaks about the resurrection of the **Lord** in the next verse. Alternate translation: “the Lord is in a human body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
729	1CO	6	14	tayy	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, **Now** introduces one way in which “the Lord is for the body” ([6:13](../06/13.md)). Human bodies are important and are not for sexual immorality, because God will raise those who believe to new life, and this includes human bodies. If **Now** would not introduce a further development of the argument in your language, you could use a word or phrase that does function in this way. Alternate translation: “Further,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
730	1CO	6	14	ev9l	figs-idiom	τὸν Κύριον ἤγειρεν, καὶ ἡμᾶς ἐξεγερεῖ	1	raised the Lord	Paul uses the words **raised** and **raise up** to refer to someone who had previously died coming back to life. If your language does not use these words to describe coming back to life, you could use a comparable idiom or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “restored the Lord to life and will also restore us to life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
731	1CO	6	14	jvng		ἤγειρεν…ἐξεγερεῖ	1		Here, **raised** and **raise up** have the same meaning. Paul uses a slightly different word for variety or because he is referring to the future. In your translation, you could use the same word for **raised** and **raise up**. Alternate translation: “raised … will … raise”
732	1CO	6	14	wgh4	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τῆς δυνάμεως αὐτοῦ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **power**, you could express the idea by using an adverb such as “powerfully” or an adjective such as “powerful.” Alternate translation: “by working powerfully” or “by his powerful action” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
733	1CO	6	15	gt2x	figs-metaphor	μέλη Χριστοῦ…τὰ μέλη τοῦ Χριστοῦ…πόρνης μέλη	1	Do you not know that your bodies are members of Christ?	Here Paul speaks as if the Corinthians were **members**, which are body parts, that belong either to **Christ** or to a **prostitute**. He speaks in this way to indicate how closely joined the Corinthians are either to **Christ** or to a **prostitute**. This union is as close as the union between a finger and the body to which it belongs. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “united to Christ … people who are united to Christ … unite with a prostitute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
734	1CO	6	15	io5p	figs-rquestion	οὐκ οἴδατε, ὅτι τὰ σώματα ὑμῶν μέλη Χριστοῦ ἐστιν?	1		Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, we know.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “You should know that your bodies are members of Christ.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
735	1CO	6	15	agvy	figs-metaphor	ἄρας…τὰ μέλη τοῦ Χριστοῦ	1		Here Paul speaks about **taking away the members of Christ** as if, like cutting off a finger, he could remove a body part from **Christ**. He speaks in this way to show how bad it is to remove a person from union with **Christ**. It is as bad as cutting off a finger, arm, or leg from a person’s body. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “having removed people from union with Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
736	1CO	6	15	f4vd	figs-rquestion	ἄρας…τὰ μέλη τοῦ Χριστοῦ, ποιήσω πόρνης μέλη?	1	Shall I then take away the members of Christ and join them to a prostitute? May it not be!	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “no, you should not.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong negation. Alternate translation: “I should never take away the members of Christ and make them members of a prostitute.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
737	1CO	6	15	h21r	figs-123person	ποιήσω	1	Shall I then take away the members of Christ and join them to a prostitute? May it not be!	Here Paul speaks in the first person because he is using himself as an example. If your readers would misunderstand why Paul uses the first person here, you could include a word or phrase that clarifies that Paul is treating himself as an example, or you could use a form that would naturally provide an example in your language. Alternate translation: “should I, for example, make them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
738	1CO	6	15	kmt2	figs-idiom	μὴ γένοιτο	1	May it not be!	Here, **May it never be!** gives Paul’s own response to his question. The phrase is one of the strongest negatives Paul could use. Use a strong word or phrase that answers a question with a no. Alternate translation: “Never!” or “Absolutely not!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
739	1CO	6	16	seg6	figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι ὁ κολλώμενος τῇ πόρνῃ, ἓν σῶμά ἐστιν?	1	Do you not know that … her?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, we know.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea as an emphatic statement. Alternate translation: “You know for sure that the one who is joined to the prostitute is one body.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
740	1CO	6	16	zcgg	figs-euphemism	ὁ κολλώμενος τῇ πόρνῃ	1	Do you not know that … her?	Here, being **joined to the prostitute** is a euphemism for having sex with a **prostitute**. Paul uses this euphemism in order to be polite. He also picks this specific euphemism because it can also refer to being **joined** to someone without sexual implications. He uses the phrase in this way in the next verse to speak about union with Christ ([6:17](../06/17.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **joined to the prostitute**, you could use a similar polite euphemism in your language. If possible, use a euphemism that can also work to describe the non-sexual union with Christ in the next verse. Alternate translation: “the one who lives with the prostitute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
741	1CO	6	16	z54k	figs-activepassive	ὁ κολλώμενος τῇ πόρνῃ	1	he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with her	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **joined** rather than the person doing the “joining.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the person did it to himself. Alternate translation: “the one who joins himself to the prostitute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
742	1CO	6	16	w1am	figs-genericnoun	τῇ πόρνῃ	1	he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with her	Jesus is speaking of prostitutes in general, not of one particular **prostitute**. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a phrase that refers in general to “prostitutes.” Alternate translation: “to any prostitute” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
743	1CO	6	16	up28	figs-ellipsis	ἓν σῶμά ἐστιν	1	he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with her	Here Paul is pointing out that the **one who is joined** and the **prostitute** make up **one body** together. He is not arguing that the **one who is joined** by himself is **one body**. If your readers would misunderstand this point, you could include some words that Paul implies. Alternate translation: “is one body with her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
744	1CO	6	16	fioa	figs-metaphor	ἓν σῶμά ἐστιν	1	he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with her	Here Paul is speaking as if the **one who is joined** and the **prostitute** together share **one body** when they have sex. He speaks in this way to emphasize the unity that these two people have when they have sex, which is as close as if they had only one body. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “shares all things with her” or “is united to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
745	1CO	6	16	m2gm	writing-quotations	γάρ, φησίν,	1	he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with her	In Paul’s culture, **For it says** is a normal way to introduce a quotation from an important text, in this case, the Old Testament book titled “Genesis” (see [Genesis 2:24](gen/02/24.md)). If your readers would misunderstand this, you could use a comparable phrase that indicates that Paul is quoting from an important text. Alternate translation: “For it can be read in the Old Testament” or “For in the book of Genesis we read” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
746	1CO	6	16	vv2n	figs-quotations	ἔσονται…φησίν, οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν	1	he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with her	If you do not use this form in your language, you could translate these statements as indirect quotes instead of as direct quotes. Alternate translation: “it says that the two will become as one flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
747	1CO	6	16	ks89	figs-explicit	ἔσονται…οἱ δύο εἰς σάρκα μίαν	1	he who is joined to a prostitute becomes one flesh with her	The passage that Paul quotes here comes from the book of Genesis. The story is about God creating Adam and Eve, the first man and woman. When God brings Eve, the woman, to the man named Adam, the narrative comments that this is why “a man will leave his father and his mother, and he will cling to his wife, and they will become one flesh” ([Genesis 2:24](gen/02/24.md)). Paul quotes the end of this sentence here. If your readers would misunderstand what this quote refers to, you could include a footnote explaining the context. Additionally, you could clarify what the word **two** refers to. Alternate translation: “A man and a woman will become as one flesh” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
748	1CO	6	17	zyjd	figs-metaphor	ὁ…κολλώμενος τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	he who is joined to the Lord becomes one spirit with him	Here, being **joined to the Lord** refers to what Paul elsewhere describes as being “in Christ” or “united to Christ.” Paul uses this specific phrase because he used it in the last verse to refer to union with a “prostitute” (see [6:16](../06/16.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **joined to the Lord**, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. If possible, use the same words you that you used in the last verse for “joined to the prostitute.” Alternate translation: “the one who lives with the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
749	1CO	6	17	c2tb	figs-activepassive	ὁ…κολλώμενος τῷ Κυρίῳ	1	he who is joined to the Lord becomes one spirit with him	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **joined** rather than the person doing the “joining.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that the person did it to himself or herself. Alternate translation: “the one who joins himself to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
750	1CO	6	17	z273	figs-ellipsis	ἓν πνεῦμά ἐστιν	1	he who is joined to the Lord becomes one spirit with him	Here Paul is pointing out that the **one who is joined** and the **Lord** make up **one spirit** together. He is not arguing that the **one who is joined** by himself is **one spirit**. If your readers would misunderstand this point, you could include some words that Paul implies. Alternate translation: “is one spirit with him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
751	1CO	6	17	vv1s	figs-metaphor	ἓν πνεῦμά ἐστιν	1	he who is joined to the Lord becomes one spirit with him	Here Paul is speaking as if the **one who is joined** and the **Lord** together share **one spirit** when the **one who is joined** believes in the **Lord**. He speaks in this way to emphasize the unity between a believer and Jesus, which is as close as if they had only one spirit. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “shares all things with him spiritually” or “is spiritually united to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
752	1CO	6	17	kt2x		πνεῦμά	1	he who is joined to the Lord becomes one spirit with him	Here, **spirit** could refer to: (1) a person’s **spirit** in contrast to his or her “body.” While a prostitute and a man can have “one body” ([6:16](../06/16.md)), which is a physical union, the Lord and a believer can have **one spirit**, which is a spiritual union. Alternate translation: “spiritually” (2) the Holy Spirit, who unites the Lord and the believer. Alternate translation: “in the Holy Spirit”
753	1CO	6	18	ex92	figs-metaphor	φεύγετε	1	Flee from	Here Paul wants the Corinthians to avoid **sexual immorality** as urgently as if it were an enemy or danger that they might **flee from**. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could use a comparable metaphor or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “Carefully stay away from” or “Fight against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
754	1CO	6	18	nhpq	figs-abstractnouns	τὴν πορνείαν	1	Flee from	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **immorality**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “immoral.” Alternate translation: “what is sexually immoral” or “sexually immoral behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
755	1CO	6	18	sc9d	grammar-connect-exceptions	πᾶν ἁμάρτημα ὃ ἐὰν ποιήσῃ ἄνθρωπος ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματός ἐστιν, ὁ δὲ πορνεύων εἰς τὸ ἴδιον σῶμα ἁμαρτάνει	1	immorality! Every other sin that a person commits is outside the body, but	If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using exception language. Alternate translation: “Almost every sin that a man might commit is outside the body, but the one who is sexually immoral sins against his own body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
756	1CO	6	18	dfck	figs-gendernotations	ἄνθρωπος…τὸ ἴδιον	1	immorality! Every other sin that a person commits is outside the body, but	Although **man** and **his** are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **man** and **his**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “a man or woman … his or her own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
757	1CO	6	18	jr46	figs-metaphor	ἐκτὸς τοῦ σώματός ἐστιν	1	sin that a person commits	Here Paul speaks as if sins were located **outside the body**. By speaking in this way, he means that most sins do not affect the **body** the way **sexual immorality** does. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea non-figuratively or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “does not directly affect the body” or “is apart from the body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
758	1CO	6	19	i5bt	grammar-connect-words-phrases	ἢ	1	Do you not know … God? … that you are not your own?	The word **Or** introduces an alternate to what Paul speaks about in [6:18](../06/18.md). Some people are indeed “sinning against their bodies.” Paul gives the correct alternative: they should **know** that their bodies are the “temple” of the **Holy Spirit**. If your readers would misunderstand **Or**, you could use a word that signifies a contrast or gives an alternative. Alternate translation: “Rather,” or “On the other hand,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
759	1CO	6	19	qy5j	figs-rquestion	ἢ οὐκ οἴδατε ὅτι τὸ σῶμα ὑμῶν, ναὸς τοῦ ἐν ὑμῖν Ἁγίου Πνεύματός ἐστιν, οὗ ἔχετε ἀπὸ Θεοῦ?	1	Do you not know … God? … that you are not your own?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The question assumes that the answer is “yes, we know.” If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could express the idea with a strong affirmation. Alternate translation: “You certainly know that your body is a temple of the Holy Spirit in you, whom you have from God.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
760	1CO	6	19	bb35	grammar-collectivenouns	τὸ σῶμα ὑμῶν	1	your body	The word **body** is a singular noun that refers to multiple “bodies.” Paul makes this clear by using a plural **your**. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “each of your bodies” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
761	1CO	6	19	d2mc	figs-metaphor	ναὸς τοῦ ἐν ὑμῖν Ἁγίου Πνεύματός	1	temple of the Holy Spirit	Here Paul speaks of the relationship between the believer and the **Holy Spirit** as if the believer were a **temple** and the **Holy Spirit** were the god that dwelled in that temple. In Paul’s culture, deities had specific temples, and they would be specially present to their worshipers in those temples. Paul applies this thinking to believers. Each believer is a **temple**, and the **Holy Spirit** is **in** each believer. This means that the Holy Spirit is specially present with each believer. This is a significant metaphor in the Bible so, if possible, preserve the metaphor or express the idea by using a simile. Alternate translation: “is a temple in which the Holy Spirit dwells” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
762	1CO	6	19	cg8m		οὗ ἔχετε ἀπὸ Θεοῦ	1	temple of the Holy Spirit	Alternate translation: “whom God has given to you”
763	1CO	6	20	vzz8	figs-metaphor	ἠγοράσθητε…τιμῆς	1	For you were bought with a price	Here Paul speaks if the Corinthians were slaves whom God had **bought with a price** from someone else. Paul is speaking of what we often call “redemption.” The **price** is Christ’s death on the cross, which “redeems” believers from sin and evil powers. This is an important biblical metaphor so, if possible, preserve the metaphor or express it as an analogy. Alternate translation: “you were bought with a price, which is the Messiah’s death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
764	1CO	6	20	qv47	figs-activepassive	ἠγοράσθητε…τιμῆς	1	For you were bought with a price	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **bought** rather than the person doing the “buying.” If you must state who did the action, Paul implies that “God” did it. Alternate translation: “God bought you with a price” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
765	1CO	6	20	y7fe		ἐν τῷ σώματι ὑμῶν	1	Therefore	Alternate translation: “with your body” or “with what you do with your body”
766	1CO	6	20	t65e	translate-textvariants	ἐν τῷ σώματι ὑμῶν	1	Therefore	After **your body**, a few early manuscripts include “and in your spirit, which belong to God.” Most early manuscripts do not include these additional words. If possible, do not include this addition. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
767	1CO	7	intro	a25m			0		# 1 Corinthians 7 General Notes<br><br>## Structure and Formatting<br><br>4. On abstinence (7:1–40)<br> * Directions on sex in marriage (7:1–7)<br> * Directions on marriage and divorce (7:8–16)<br> * Believers should remain as God called them (7:17–24)<br> * Benefit of staying as one is, whether single or married (7:25–35)<br> * Exceptions for engaged Christians and widows (7:36–40)<br><br>## Special Concepts in this Chapter<br><br>### The letter from the Corinthians to Paul<br><br>In [7:1](../07/01.md), Paul says that the Corinthians wrote to him. In fact, the second half of the verse is probably a quote from their letter to Paul. To show this, the ULT puts the quotation inside quotation marks. We do not know what else the letter included about marriage and sex. In the rest of the chapter, though, Paul responds to what they wrote to him.<br><br>### Sex and marriage<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul speaks at length about sex and marriage. While he does not argue this here, he assumes that sexual relations should only take place within a marriage. This is clear when he says that lack of sexual self-control is a good reason to get married in [7:9](../07/09.md). Further, he has four categories of people in mind: those who have never gotten married, those who are engaged to be married, those who are no longer married (whether through divorce or death of a spouse), and those who are currently married. Whether your language has more or fewer categories for marital status, make the distinctions between these four categories as clear as possible.<br><br>### Sanctification of unbelieving spouse and children<br><br>In [7:12–16](../07/12.md), Paul addresses Christian men and women who have an unbelieving spouse. He specifically argues that they should stay together unless the unbelieving spouse wishes to leave the marriage. He argues that they should stay together because the unbelieving spouse and the children are “sanctified” by the believing spouse. By “sanctified,” Paul does not mean that the unbelieving spouse and the children are considered to be Christians whom God will save. Rather, “sanctified” identifies the unbelieving spouse and the children as appropriate family for the believing spouse. In other words, having an unbelieving spouse does not make one’s marriage and children improper before God. Instead, God “sanctifies” them. If your language has a way to refer to an improper or unacceptable marriage, you might be able to use those kinds of words here.<br><br>### Divorce<br><br>In this passage, Paul uses a number of words and phrases to refer to what we call divorce: “being separated” ([7:10–11](../07/10.md)), “divorce” ([11–13](../07/11.md)), “departing” ([15](../07/15.md)), and “being released” ([27](../07/27.md)). In Paul’s culture, the rules for divorce were different in different places, and some divorces would have been more formal and legal than others. Additionally, in many places both men and women could divorce a spouse, but in a few places only men could divorce their wives. If Paul’s language would be understood in your language, you should try to preserve the different words and phrases he uses. If you need to make his language more consistent, use a word or phrase that refers generally to ending a marriage. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/divorce]])<br><br>### The “virgin”<br><br>In [7:25–38](../07/25.md), Paul refers repeatedly to “virgins.” With this word, he identifies a woman who has never been married. The word does not necessarily mean that the woman has never had any sexual experiences. When Paul identifies the virgin as “his virgin,” he refers either to a woman who is engaged to be married to a man or to a daughter who is under the authority of her father (see the last section in this introduction). In your language, use a word or phrase that refers to a woman who has never been married.<br><br>### The “coming distress”<br><br>In [7:26](../07/26.md), Paul speaks of the “coming distress.” This is trouble, persecution, or difficulties that affect the Corinthian church and perhaps all churches. When Paul says that the distress is “coming,” he could mean that it has already begun to happen and will continue to happen. It is more likely, however, that “coming” means that the distress is about to begin. Because of this “distress,” Paul thinks that believers are better off not getting married. It is unclear what Paul thought about the length of this “distress.” Is the “distress” still happening in the present day? It is better not to clarify the answer to this in your translation, since Paul does not give any hints. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/trouble]])<br><br>### Calling<br><br>Paul refers consistently to a “calling” and to “being called” in [7:17–24](../07/17.md). Throughout this section, “being called” refers to God’s action to save a person. Paul speaks about a person’s situation when they “were called” as a “calling” in [7:20](../07/20.md), while in other places he specifies what that situation might be: married or unmarried, circumcised or uncircumcised, slave or free. The point Paul wishes to make is that God’s “call” does not require one to change one’s situation. Rather, God’s “call” is for people to serve him in the situation they are in. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/call]])<br><br>## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter<br><br>### Euphemisms for having sex<br><br>In the first half of this chapter, Paul uses many euphemisms for having sex: “touching a woman” ([7:1](../07/01.md)), “duty” ([3](../07/03.md)), not “depriving each other” ([5](../07/05.md)), and being “together again” ([5](../07/05.md)). In most cases, he speaks in this way to be polite and avoid offending those who would read the letter. When this is true, you can translate Paul’s language with any polite way of referring to having sex in your language. However, the euphemism “duty” in ([7:3](../07/03.md)) particularly emphasizes that married couples are required to have sex. If your language has a euphemism that emphasizes “duty,” you could use it in that verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])<br><br>### Redemption<br><br>Just as in [6:20](../06/20.md), in [7:23](../07/23.md) Paul tells the Corinthians that they have been “bought with a price.” He does not state what the price is or from whom God bought the Corinthians. However, it is clear that Paul is speaking about what we call “redemption” here. Paul thinks of the Corinthians as slaves who are for sale, and God buys them from their previous owner by paying a price. The previous owner can be understood as sin, death, and evil powers, while the price is Jesus the Son dying for believers. You should not include all these implications in your translation, but you should use words that can be interpreted in this way. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/redeem]])<br><br>### Those who have … should be as those who do not have …<br><br>In [7:29–31](../07/29.md), Paul emphasizes that those who have or do something “should be as those” who do not have or do that thing. He emphasizes this by giving a list of five examples. Paul’s point is that actions or things related to this world should not define who Christians are. He backs this up in [7:31](../07/31.md) by stating that “the present form of this world is passing away.” Therefore, those who weep should act like those who do not weep, and those who are married should act like those who are not married. Neither weeping nor marriage should have an impact on who the Christian is and on what the Christian does. As a Christian, none of these five things, which stand for everything in the “present form of this world,” are significant for one’s relationship to God. If possible, preserve the strong contrasts, which almost sound like contradictions. These strong contrasts are an essential part of Paul’s argument.<br><br>### Rhetorical questions<br><br>Paul uses rhetorical questions in [7:16](../07/16.md). He asks these questions to involve the Corinthians in his argument and to force them to think about what he is saying. He again uses rhetorical questions in [7:18](../07/18.md), [21](../07/21.md), [27](../07/27.md). He asks these questions for a different reason: to identify those to whom his statements apply. If possible, you should preserve these questions. However, if your language does not use rhetorical questions, see the notes on each question for other translation possibilities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])<br><br>## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter<br><br>### Translating gendered words<br><br>In much of this chapter, Paul uses masculine and feminine words to identify when he is addressing men and when he is addressing women. Unlike in most of the previous chapters, then, you should intentionally preserve most of the gendered language in this chapter. The notes will identify any cases of gendered language that refer to all people. If there is no note, assume that the gendered language is functioning to distinguish between genders.<br><br>### Who speaks, Paul or the Lord?<br><br>Throughout this chapter, Paul uses a number of phrases to indicate whose authority lies behind the commands he gives. First, he marks [7:10–11](../07/10.md) as something that the Lord, not him, has spoken. Of course, he himself is speaking, but he is summarizing the Lord’s teaching on divorce. Therefore, “not I, but the Lord” in [7:11](../07/11.md) is Paul’s way of indicating that he is summarizing teaching directly from the Lord. Second, he marks [7:12–16](../07/12.md) as something he commands. By using “I, not the Lord” in [7:12](../07/12.md), he indicates that he gives the commands that follow on his own authority as an apostle. He is not saying that these commands are not as authoritative or important as those in [7:10–11](../07/10.md). Third, Paul introduces [7:25–40](../07/25.md) by stating that again he does “not have a command from the Lord,” but that he gives “an opinion” that God has made “trustworthy.” He concludes the section by stating that he has given his “judgment,” and he has the “Spirit of God” ([7:40](../07/40.md)). This is a slightly weaker claim to authority than he made in [7:12](../07/12.md): these are his “opinion” or “judgment.” However, Paul also claims that God has made him “trustworthy” and given him the Spirit, so these verses should not be taken simply as Paul’s private opinion. Rather, Paul himself already provides exceptions and qualifications in this section because he is less confident. Do not translate what Paul says as if it is advice from anyone. Instead, this whole chapter carries apostolic authority.<br><br>### Father or fiancé in [7:36–38](../07/36.md)?<br><br>In these verses, Paul repeatedly refers to “he” or “him.” He does not state who this man is, but the man has a “virgin.” There are two common ways to understand these verses. First, and more likely, the man is engaged to “his virgin,” and Paul is giving him instructions on whether to get married or not. Second, and less likely, the man is the father of the daughter (“his virgin”), and Paul is giving him instructions on whether to give his daughter in marriage or not. If a specific translation choice follows one of these interpretations instead of the other, the notes on these verses will point out whether it matches the “fiancé interpretation” or the “father interpretation.”
768	1CO	7	1	y4lx	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	Now	Here, **Now** introduces a new topic in the letter. Paul begins to discuss things that the Corinthians asked him about in a letter. If your readers would misunderstand **Now**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new topic. Alternate translation: “Next,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
769	1CO	7	1	jq21	figs-explicit	ὧν ἐγράψατε	1	the issues you wrote about	The phrase **what you wrote** implies that the Corinthians had previously written a letter to Paul in which they asked him questions. Paul now begins to answer those questions. If **what you wrote** would not imply that the Corinthians had already written a letter to Paul, you could make this explicit. Alternate translation: “what you wrote to me in your letter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
770	1CO	7	1	erl5	figs-explicit	ἐγράψατε, καλὸν ἀνθρώπῳ, γυναικὸς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι	1	“It is good for a man not to touch a woman.”	Here Paul could be: (1) quoting what the Corinthians said in their letter so that he can respond to it, much like he did in [6:12–13](../06/12.md). Alternate translation: “you wrote: you say, ‘It is good for a man not to touch a woman.’” (2) expressing his own views about men and women. Alternate translation: “you wrote: It is true that it is good for a man not to touch a woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
771	1CO	7	1	inrh		καλὸν ἀνθρώπῳ, γυναικὸς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι;	1		Alternate translation: “When a man does not touch a woman, that is good”
772	1CO	7	1	cm7y	figs-explicit	ἀνθρώπῳ, γυναικὸς	1	for a man	While the words **man** and **woman** could refer specifically to “husband” and “wife,” Paul is quoting a more general statement here that refers to men and women in general. If your readers would misunderstand **man** and **woman**, you could use words that refer more specifically to the sex of the people involved. Alternate translation: “for a male … a female” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
773	1CO	7	1	z9j5	figs-genericnoun	ἀνθρώπῳ, γυναικὸς	1		Here Paul refers to **man** and **woman** in the singular, but he is speaking generically of any **man** and any **woman**. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you could use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “for men … women” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
774	1CO	7	1	mx7w	figs-euphemism	ἀνθρώπῳ, γυναικὸς μὴ ἅπτεσθαι	1	not to touch a woman	Here, **for a man** to **touch a woman** is a euphemism for having sex. This is a general statement about having sex, although Paul primarily speaks about sex within marriage in the verses that follow. The Corinthians used this euphemism in their letter to Paul in order to be polite. If your readers would misunderstand **for a man not to touch a woman**, you could use a similar polite euphemism in your language. Alternate translation: “for a man not to sleep with a woman” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
775	1CO	7	2	c3uq	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1	But because	Here, **But** introduces the qualifications Paul wishes to give for the statement in the previous verse: “{It is} good for a man not to touch a woman.” Paul wishes to give qualifications about whether that statement is from the Corinthians or is Paul’s own statement. Use a word or phrase in your culture that introduces qualifications to a claim. Alternate translation: “However,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
776	1CO	7	2	fys4	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ…τὰς πορνείας	1	But because of temptations for many immoral acts, each	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **immorality**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “immoral.” Alternate translation: “because people are immoral” or “because of immoral behavior” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
777	1CO	7	2	ktqd	figs-metonymy	διὰ…τὰς πορνείας	1		Here, **because of immorality** refers to how people desire to commit **immorality** and do commit **immorality**. Paul does not refer to **immorality** in the abstract. If your readers would misunderstand **immorality**, you could include a word or phrase that refers to “temptation” or “behavior.” Alternate translation: “because of the temptation of immorality” or “because people act immorally” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
778	1CO	7	2	r822	figs-imperative	ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα ἐχέτω, καὶ ἑκάστη τὸν ἴδιον ἄνδρα ἐχέτω	1		Here Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea by using a word such as “should” or “allow.” Alternate translation: “each man should have his own wife, and each woman should have her own husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
779	1CO	7	2	j4wc	figs-idiom	ἕκαστος τὴν ἑαυτοῦ γυναῖκα ἐχέτω, καὶ ἑκάστη τὸν ἴδιον ἄνδρα ἐχέτω	1		The phrases “to have a wife” and “to have a husband” refer primarily to the ongoing state of being married, which includes continuing to have sex. However, the idiom primarily emphasizes remaining in a state of marriage with one’s current spouse. If your readers would misunderstand “to have a wife or husband,” you could use a comparable idiom or refer directly to staying married. Alternate translation: “let each man continue in marriage with his own wife, and let each woman continue in marriage with her own husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
780	1CO	7	3	he0c	figs-genericnoun	τῇ γυναικὶ ὁ ἀνὴρ…ἡ γυνὴ τῷ ἀνδρί	1		Here Paul refers to **the husband** and **the wife** in the singular, but he is speaking generically about any **husband** and **wife**. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you could use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “each husband … to his wife … each wife … to her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
781	1CO	7	3	xv9s	figs-imperative	ὁ ἀνὴρ…ἀποδιδότω	1		Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “A husband should give” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
782	1CO	7	3	mj8l	figs-euphemism	τῇ γυναικὶ ὁ ἀνὴρ τὴν ὀφειλὴν ἀποδιδότω	1	sexual rights	Here Paul uses **duty** to refer to married couples having sex. He uses this word to be polite and also because he wishes to emphasize that having sex is an obligation for married couples. If your readers would misunderstand **duty**, you could use a comparable euphemism or refer directly to how married couples “should” have sex. Alternate translation: “Let the husband fulfill his sexual obligations to the wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
783	1CO	7	3	vhv1	figs-ellipsis	ὁμοίως…καὶ ἡ γυνὴ τῷ ἀνδρί	1	likewise the wife to her husband	Here Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words from the first half of the verse to complete the thought. Alternate translation: “likewise let the wife also give to the husband the duty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
784	1CO	7	4	px2s	figs-genericnoun	ἡ γυνὴ…ὁ ἀνήρ…ὁ ἀνὴρ…ἡ γυνή	1		Just as in [7:3](../07/03.md), Paul here refers to **the husband** and **the wife** in the singular, but he is speaking generically about any **husband** and **wife**. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you could use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “each wife … her husband {does} … each husband … his wife {does}” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
785	1CO	7	4	a7nb	figs-abstractnouns	τοῦ ἰδίου σώματος οὐκ ἐξουσιάζει	-1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **authority**, you could express the idea by using a verb or verbal phrase such as “control” or “claim as one’s own.” Alternate translation: “does not control her own body … does not control his own body” or “does not claim her body as her own … does not claim his body as his own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
786	1CO	7	4	sspg	figs-ellipsis	ὁ ἀνήρ…ἡ γυνή	1		In both these places, Paul omits some words that may be required in your language to make a full sentence. You could supply words from the first half of each statement in order to complete the thought, as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “the husband has authority over her body … the wife has authority over his body” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
787	1CO	7	5	qq7u	figs-euphemism	μὴ ἀποστερεῖτε ἀλλήλους	1	Do not deprive each other	Here Paul omits a direct reference to having sex in order to be polite. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean that they should not **deprive each other** of having sex. If your readers also would understand this, you can express the idea the same way Paul did. If your readers would not understand this, you may need to include a word or phrase that politely refers to having sex. Alternate translation: “Do not deprive each other of sleeping together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
788	1CO	7	5	wzeh	grammar-connect-exceptions	μὴ ἀποστερεῖτε ἀλλήλους, εἰ μήτι ἂν ἐκ συμφώνου	1		If it would appear in your language that Paul was making a statement here and then contradicting it, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “You should deprive each other only in one situation: by mutual agreement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
789	1CO	7	5	cnr5	figs-abstractnouns	ἐκ συμφώνου	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **agreement**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “agree.” Alternate translation: “when you both agree” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
790	1CO	7	5	d3cr	figs-idiom	πρὸς καιρὸν	1		Here, **for a season** identifies a short, undefined period of time. The word **season** does not refer to winter or summer. If your readers would misunderstand **for a season**, you could use a word or phrase that refers vaguely to a short time. Alternate translation: “for a short period of time” “for a brief time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
791	1CO	7	5	gh0e	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	1		Here, **so that** introduces the purpose for which the Corinthians can **deprive each other**. In other words, it gives the purpose for the **except** statement. If your readers would misunderstand what **so that** refers back to, you could clarify that it explains why the Corinthians can **deprive each other**. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “You may deprive each only so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
792	1CO	7	5	uq6x	translate-unknown	σχολάσητε τῇ προσευχῇ	1	so that you may devote yourselves to prayer	Here, **devote yourselves** refers to making time to focus on something specific. Paul argues that the only time to avoid having sex with one’s spouse is so that both spouses have extra time to focus on praying to God. If your readers would misunderstand **devote yourselves**, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “you may make more time for prayer” or “you may spend more time in prayer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
793	1CO	7	5	nww5	figs-abstractnouns	τῇ προσευχῇ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **prayer**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “praying.” Alternate translation: “to praying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
794	1CO	7	5	s1ya	figs-euphemism	ἐπὶ τὸ αὐτὸ ἦτε	1	come together again	Here, **be together again** is a polite way to refer to resuming sexual relations. If your readers would misunderstand **be together again**, you could use a comparable phrase that politely refers to having sex. Alternate translation: “sleep together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
795	1CO	7	5	mdj0	grammar-connect-logic-goal	ἵνα	2		Here, **so that** could introduce the purpose for which: (1) the Corinthians need quickly to **be together again**. It is because Satan will **tempt** them unless they are **together**. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “Be together again soon so that” (2) the Corinthians should not **deprive each other**. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “The point of not depriving each other is so that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-goal]])
796	1CO	7	5	md2z	grammar-connect-logic-result	διὰ	1		Here, **because** could introduce the reason why: (1) **Satan** may **tempt** them. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a comma before it. Alternate translation: “which he would do because of” (2) they should soon **be together again**. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add a period before it. Alternate translation: “You should do this because of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
797	1CO	7	5	ii8n	figs-abstractnouns	διὰ τὴν ἀκρασίαν ὑμῶν	1	because of your lack of self-control	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **self-control**, you could express the idea by using a verbal phrase such as “cannot restrain.” Alternate translation: “because you cannot restrain yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
798	1CO	7	6	wrma	writing-pronouns	τοῦτο	1		Here, **this** could refer to: (1) what Paul has said about the one situation in which they may “deprive each other” in [7:5](../07/05.md). Alternate translation: “this about when you may deprive each other” (2) what Paul has said about how married couples should regularly have sex in [7:2–5](../07/02.md). Alternate translation: “this about being married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
799	1CO	7	6	hprb	figs-infostructure	κατὰ συνγνώμην, οὐ κατ’ ἐπιταγήν	1		If your language would express the negative statement before the positive, you could reverse the order of these two phrases. Alternate translation: “not as a command but as a concession” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
800	1CO	7	6	ncig	translate-unknown	συνγνώμην	1		Here, **a concession** is something that one allows even though one does not entirely agree with it. Usually, the **concession** is made because one wishes to avoid antagonizing the person one is dealing with. If your readers would misunderstand **concession**, you could express the idea by using a comparable word or phrase. Alternate translation: “a compromise” or “an allowance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
801	1CO	7	6	zsy3	figs-abstractnouns	κατὰ συνγνώμην, οὐ κατ’ ἐπιταγήν	1		If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas behind **concession** and **command**, you could express the idea by using a verb such as “concede” and “command.” Alternate translation: “because I concede it, not because I command it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
802	1CO	7	7	b7xz	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	1		Here, **But** introduces a contrast with everything that Paul has said in [7:1–6](../07/01.md). In those verses, he speaks about how believers should act when they are already married. Now, however, he begins to talk about getting married, and he says that he wishes that people stayed unmarried, like he does. The **But** introduces a new stage in the argument that deals with getting married. If your readers would misunderstand **But**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces a new but related topic. Alternate translation: “Now” or “Moving on,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
803	1CO	7	7	rbe7	figs-explicit	εἶναι ὡς καὶ ἐμαυτόν	1	were as I am	When Paul wrote this letter, he was not married, and as far as we know, he was never married. When Paul says that he wishes that all people were **even as myself**, he is referring to how he is unmarried. If your readers would misunderstand **to be even as myself**, you could include the fact that Paul is not married. Alternate translation: “to be unmarried as I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
804	1CO	7	7	mlsi	figs-gendernotations	ἀνθρώπους…ἴδιον	1		Although **men** and **him** are masculine, Paul is using these words to refer to anyone, whether man or woman. If your readers would misunderstand **men** and **him**, you could use non-gendered words or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “men and women … his or her own” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
805	1CO	7	7	zima	figs-metaphor	χάρισμα	1		Here Paul speaks about the way of life that God has called each person to live as if it were a **gift** that each person receives from God. By using **gift**, Paul emphasizes that the person receives the **gift** freely from God and that the **gift** is a good thing. If your readers would misunderstand **gift**, you could express the idea non-figuratively or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “blessing” or “calling” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
806	1CO	7	7	w9ld	figs-ellipsis	ὁ μὲν οὕτως, ὁ δὲ οὕτως	1	But each one has his own gift from God. One has this kind of gift, and another that kind	Here Paul omits some words that may be necessary in your language to make a complete thought. If your language needs these words, you could include a phrase such as “acts in” or “live in.” Alternate translation: “one indeed acts in this way, and another acts in that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
807	1CO	7	8	y6lc	translate-unknown	τοῖς ἀγάμοις	1		Here, **unmarried** could refer to: (1) people who are not currently married, whether they never have been married or are no longer married. Alternate translation: “to those without spouses” (2) men whose wives have died, which pairs well with **widows**. Alternate translation: “to the widowers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
808	1CO	7	8	n401	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς ἀγάμοις	1		Paul is using the adjective **unmarried** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate **unmarried** with a noun phrase or a relative clause. Alternate translation: “to those who are unmarried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
809	1CO	7	8	s7s9	translate-unknown	ταῖς χήραις	1		Here, **widows** refers specifically to women whose husbands have died. It does not refer to men whose wives have died. Alternate translation: “to women who are widowed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
810	1CO	7	8	f43d	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν	1		Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that people might **remain** as Paul is or they might not. He specifies that it is **good** if they do **remain**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “whenever” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
811	1CO	7	8	r27x	figs-explicit	μείνωσιν ὡς κἀγώ	1	it is good	Just as in [7:7](../07/07.md), Paul again assumes that his readers know that he is unmarried. When Paul says that it is good for **the unmarried** and **the widows** to **remain as I also am**, he is referring to how he is unmarried. If your readers would misunderstand **remain as I also am**, you could include the fact that Paul is not married. Alternate translation: “remain without a spouse, as I also am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
812	1CO	7	9	o4j5	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ…οὐκ ἐνκρατεύονται, γαμησάτωσαν	1		Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that people might **have self-control** or they might not. Here he gives instructions for if they **do not have self-control**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “whoever does not have self-control should marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
813	1CO	7	9	bxa2	figs-abstractnouns	οὐκ ἐνκρατεύονται	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **self-control**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “self-controlled” or a verbal phrase such as “control themselves.” Alternate translation: “they are not self-controlled” or “they do not control themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
814	1CO	7	9	jy8g	figs-imperative	γαμησάτωσαν	1		Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “let” or “should,” as the ULT does. Alternate translation: “let them marry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
815	1CO	7	9	ty79	figs-metaphor	πυροῦσθαι	1	to burn with desire	Here, **to burn** is a way to refer to sexual desire. Paul uses **burn** because he represents the desire as hard to fight and as something that consumes a person like fire consumes a building. If your readers would misunderstand this figure of speech, you could express the idea with a comparable metaphor or by including a reference to sexual desire. Alternate translation: “to burn with desire” or “to lust after someone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
816	1CO	7	10	gxni	figs-nominaladj	τοῖς…γεγαμηκόσιν	1		Paul is using the adjective **married** as a noun in order to describe a group of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate **married** with a noun phrase or a relative clause. Alternate translation: “to those who are married” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
817	1CO	7	10	zwgk	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	οὐκ ἐγὼ, ἀλλὰ ὁ Κύριος	1		Here Paul clarifies that he is not the authority behind this command. It is **the Lord** who is the authority here. Paul specifically has in mind what **the Lord** said about marriage and divorce while he was on earth (see [Mark 10:5–12](mrk/10/05.md)). If your readers would misunderstand **not I, but the Lord**, you could either identify that it is not Paul “alone” who gives the command, or you could clarify that Paul is referring to what **the Lord** said. Alternate translation: “not I alone, but the Lord also” or “and here I refer to what the Lord said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
818	1CO	7	10	ywsy	figs-genericnoun	γυναῖκα ἀπὸ ἀνδρὸς	1		Here Paul is speaking of wives and husbands in general, not just of one **wife** and **husband**. If your readers would misunderstand **wife** and **husband**, you could use a comparable way to refer generically to wives and husbands. Alternate translation: “each wife … from her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
819	1CO	7	10	hc5p	figs-idiom	ἀπὸ…μὴ χωρισθῆναι	1	should not separate from	Here, **to be separated from** is technical language for ending a marriage before death. The phrase does not distinguish between “separation” and “divorce.” If possible, use a similar general phrase in your language. Alternate translation: “is not to divorce or separate from” or “is not to break up with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
820	1CO	7	10	h049	figs-activepassive	μὴ χωρισθῆναι	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the **wife**, who is **separated**, rather than the person doing the “separating.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the **wife** does it herself. Alternate translation: “is not to separate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
821	1CO	7	11	wtbo	figs-infostructure	ἐὰν δὲ καὶ χωρισθῇ, μενέτω ἄγαμος ἢ τῷ ἀνδρὶ καταλλαγήτω	1		The ULT puts this clause in parentheses because it is a qualification of what Paul said in [7:11](../07/11.md) and because one can read [7:10–11](../07/10.md) smoothly together without this clause. In this clause, Paul issues commands about what the wife is supposed to do if she divorces her husband despite what Paul has said. Use a form in your language that would indicate a qualification or a parenthesis. Alternate translation: “if she is separated despite what I have said, let her remain unmarried, or let her be reconciled to the husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
822	1CO	7	11	r5oz	figs-genericnoun	χωρισθῇ…τῷ ἀνδρὶ…ἄνδρα…γυναῖκα	1		Here Paul is speaking of wives and husbands in general, not just of one **wife** and **husband**. If your readers would misunderstand **wife** and **husband**, you could use a comparable way to refer generically to wives and husbands. Alternate translation: “one of the wives might be separated … to her husband … each husband … his wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
823	1CO	7	11	pqr9	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	ἐὰν δὲ καὶ χωρισθῇ, μενέτω	1		Here Paul uses **even if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a wife **might be separated**, or she might not. He then specifies the result if **she** is **separated**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the “if statement” by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or with a relative clause. Alternate translation: “but let whichever wife might be separated remain” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
824	1CO	7	11	phpw	figs-activepassive	χωρισθῇ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the “wife” who is **separated**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “separating.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the “wife” does it herself. Alternate translation: “she separates” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
825	1CO	7	11	lj79	figs-ellipsis	χωρισθῇ	1		Here Paul omits some words that might be needed in your language to make a complete thought. Paul omits them because he already used them in [7:10](../07/10.md) and he assumes his audience will infer them from there. If you need to include these words, you can insert the words “from her husband.” Alternate translation: “she might be separated from her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
826	1CO	7	11	tvo2	figs-imperative	μενέτω ἄγαμος ἢ τῷ ἀνδρὶ καταλλαγήτω	1		Here Paul uses two third-person imperatives. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea by using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “she must remain unmarried, or she must be reconciled to the husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
827	1CO	7	11	lxf7	figs-activepassive	τῷ ἀνδρὶ καταλλαγήτω	1	be reconciled to her husband	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the “wife,” who is **reconciled**, rather than focusing on the person doing the “reconciling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that the “wife” does it herself. Alternate translation: “let her reconcile with the husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
828	1CO	7	11	k7ju		ἄνδρα γυναῖκα μὴ ἀφιέναι	1		Alternate translation: “a husband should not divorce a wife”
829	1CO	7	12	k9yd		τοῖς…λοιποῖς	1	agrees	Here, **the rest** could refer to: (1) people in other situations than those already named, particularly those who are married to an unbelieving spouse. Alternate translation: “to the rest of those who are married” (2) everything else Paul is about to say. Alternate translation: “about other situations”
830	1CO	7	12	xn88	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	ἐγώ, οὐχ ὁ Κύριος	1		Here, **I, not the Lord** is the opposite of what Paul said in [7:10](../07/10.md). Paul wishes to clarify that he is the authority behind this command. Of course, **the Lord** made him an apostle and gave him authority, but he wants the Corinthians to know that he is speaking out of that authority here and not referring to what **the Lord** said while he was on earth. If your readers would misunderstand **I, not the Lord**, you could either identify that it is Paul alone who gives the command, or you could clarify that **the Lord** did not say anything about this topic. Alternate translation: “I alone” or “on my own authority, since the Lord did not speak about this topic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
831	1CO	7	12	rrfp	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἴ τις ἀδελφὸς γυναῖκα ἔχει ἄπιστον, καὶ αὕτη συνευδοκεῖ οἰκεῖν μετ’ αὐτοῦ, μὴ ἀφιέτω	1		Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a **brother** might have **an unbelieving wife**, and she might agree **to live with him**, or this situation might not happen. He then specifies the result if this situation does happen. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “but let any brother who has an unbelieving wife who agrees to live with him not divorce” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/fgrammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
832	1CO	7	12	ae1u	figs-idiom	οἰκεῖν μετ’ αὐτοῦ	1		Here, **to live with him** refers to staying married. If your readers would misunderstand **to live with him**, you could use a comparable idiom that refers to staying married. Alternate translation: “to stay with him” or “to remain married to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
833	1CO	7	12	jej3	figs-imperative	μὴ ἀφιέτω αὐτήν	1		Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “must” or “should.” Alternate translation: “he must not divorce her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
834	1CO	7	13	gtxx	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	γυνὴ εἴ τις ἔχει ἄνδρα ἄπιστον, καὶ οὗτος συνευδοκεῖ οἰκεῖν μετ’ αὐτῆς, μὴ ἀφιέτω	1		Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that a **woman** might have **an unbelieving husband**, and he might agree **to live with her**, or this situation might not happen. He then specifies the result if this situation does happen. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by introducing it with a word such as “whenever” or by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “but let any woman who has an unbelieving husband who agrees to live with her not divorce” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
835	1CO	7	13	q39l	figs-idiom	οἰκεῖν μετ’ αὐτῆς	1		Here, **to live with her** refers to staying married. If your readers would misunderstand **to live with her**, you could use a comparable idiom that refers to staying married. Alternate translation: “to stay with her” or “to remain married to her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
836	1CO	7	13	fsbq	figs-imperative	μὴ ἀφιέτω τὸν ἄνδρα	1		Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “must” or “should.” Alternate translation: “she must not divorce the husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
837	1CO	7	14	hv30	grammar-connect-logic-result	γὰρ	1		Here, **For** introduces the reason or basis for Paul’s commands in [7:12–13](../07/12.md). When one spouse is not a believer, Paul wants them to stay together, and the reason is that the unbelieving spouse is **sanctified**. If your readers would misunderstand **For**, you could use a word or phrase that introduces the basis for a command. Alternate translation: “You should do this because” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
838	1CO	7	14	k0qs	figs-genericnoun	ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ ἄπιστος ἐν τῇ γυναικί…ἡ γυνὴ ἡ ἄπιστος ἐν τῷ ἀδελφῷ	1		Here Paul is speaking of wives and husbands in general, not just of one **wife** and **husband**. If your readers would misunderstand **wife** and **husband**, you could use a comparable way to refer generically to wives and husbands. Alternate translation: “any unbelieving husband … through his wife … any unbelieving wife … through her husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
839	1CO	7	14	l84p	figs-activepassive	ἡγίασται…ὁ ἀνὴρ ὁ ἄπιστος ἐν τῇ γυναικί; καὶ ἡγίασται ἡ γυνὴ ἡ ἄπιστος ἐν τῷ ἀδελφῷ	1	For the unbelieving husband is set apart because of his wife	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **sanctified** rather than the person doing the “sanctifying.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “God sanctifies the unbelieving husband through the wife, and God sanctifies the unbelieving wife through the brother” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
840	1CO	7	14	b9rb	translate-unknown	ἡγίασται	-1		Here, **sanctified** is a reference to purity. It does not mean that the **unbelieving husband** or **unbelieving wife** is considered to be a believer. Rather, Paul’s point is that the believing spouse is not made unclean by the unbelieving spouse. Just the opposite: the marriage is clean and pure because of the believing spouse. If your readers would misunderstand **sanctified**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies an acceptable or pure marriage partner. Alternate translation: “is made clean … is made clean” or “is considered an acceptable spouse … is considered an acceptable spouse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
841	1CO	7	14	i1x4	figs-explicit	τῷ ἀδελφῷ	1	the brother	Here, **the brother** refers to a believing man, in this case the believing husband. If your readers would misunderstand **the brother**, you could clarify that **the brother** is the **unbelieving wife**’s spouse. Alternate translation: “the husband” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
842	1CO	7	14	x9vy	figs-explicit	ἐπεὶ ἄρα τὰ τέκνα ὑμῶν ἀκάθαρτά ἐστιν	1		Here, **Otherwise** refers to what the situation would be like if what Paul has just said were not true. Paul does not actually think that **your children are unclean**, but that would be true if he was wrong about the unbelieving spouse being **sanctified**. If your readers would misunderstand **Otherwise**, you could use a form that refers to a situation that the author thinks is not true. Alternate translation: “If that were not so, your children would be unclean” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-contrary]])
843	1CO	7	14	iy14	figs-123person	ὑμῶν	1		Here, **your** refers to anyone among the Corinthians who has an unbelieving spouse. Thus, it refers back to **the wife** and **the brother**. If your language would not use **your** in this situation, you could use **their** instead. Alternate translation: “their” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
844	1CO	7	14	qtbz	grammar-connect-logic-contrast	νῦν δὲ ἅγιά ἐστιν	1		Here, **but now** provides the contrast with **Otherwise your children are unclean**. The word **now** does not refer to time but rather identifies that what Paul has said about the unbelieving spouse being **sanctified** really is true. If your readers would misunderstand **now**, you could use a word or phrase that identifies that what Paul has said is true. Alternate translation: “but since the unbelieving spouse is sanctified, they are holy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
845	1CO	7	14	fmu5	translate-unknown	ἀκάθαρτά…ἅγιά	1	they are set apart	Here, **holy** is a reference to purity, and **unclean** is a reference to impurity. The word **holy** does not mean that the **children** are considered to be believers. Rather, Paul’s point is that the **children** are not made **unclean** by having an unbelieving parent. Just the opposite: the **children** are clean and pure because of the believing parent. If your readers would misunderstand **unclean** and **holy**, you could use words or phrases that identify the **children** as those born in a “clean” or “honorable” way. Alternate translation: “not pure … pure” or “dishonored … honorable” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
846	1CO	7	15	rdwy	grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical	εἰ…ὁ ἄπιστος χωρίζεται, χωριζέσθω	1		Here Paul uses **if** to introduce a true possibility. He means that **the unbeliever** might depart, or he or she might not. He then specifies the result for if **the unbeliever departs**. If your readers would misunderstand this form, you could express the **if** statement by using a relative clause. Alternate translation: “whichever unbeliever departs, let him go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-hypothetical]])
847	1CO	7	15	qjmw	figs-idiom	εἰ…ὁ ἄπιστος χωρίζεται, χωριζέσθω	1		Here, **departs** refers breaking the marriage, that is, leaving the spouse. The phrase **let him go** refers to allowing the spouse to break the marriage or leave. If these words would not refer to breaking a marriage or getting divorced in your language, you could use a comparable expression. Alternate translation: “if the unbeliever wants a divorce, let him divorce you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
848	1CO	7	15	t5tf	figs-gendernotations	ὁ ἄπιστος…χωριζέσθω	1		Although **him** is masculine, Paul is using it to refer back to **the unbeliever**, which could refer to either a man or a woman. If your readers would misunderstand **him**, you could use a non-gendered word or refer to both genders. Alternate translation: “the unbeliever … let him or her go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
849	1CO	7	15	uefj	figs-genericnoun	ὁ ἄπιστος…ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ	1		Here Paul is speaking of unbelievers, brothers, and sisters in general and not of just one **unbeliever**, **brother**, or **sister**. If your readers would misunderstand these words, you could use a comparable way to refer generically to unbelievers, brothers, and sisters. Alternate translation: “one of the unbelievers … the brother or the sister involved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
850	1CO	7	15	h9qc	figs-imperative	χωριζέσθω	1		Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “allow.” Alternate translation: “allow him to go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
851	1CO	7	15	jef4	figs-metaphor	οὐ δεδούλωται ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ	1	In such cases, the brother or sister is not bound to their vows	Here, **bound** could refer to: (1) the marriage with an unbelieving spouse. Paul is saying that the **brother or the sister** does not need to try to preserve the marriage. They are not **bound** to the unbeliever but can accept the divorce. Alternate translation: “the brother or the sister is not bound to the unbeliever” (2) the rules that Paul laid out for staying with a spouse in [7:10–13](../07/10.md). Paul is saying that **the brother or the sister** does not have to follow those rules about staying with a spouse, and perhaps he is even saying that they can marry someone else. Alternate translation: “the brother or the sister is not bound to remain unmarried” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
852	1CO	7	15	v76o	figs-explicit	ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ	1	In such cases, the brother or sister is not bound to their vows	Here Paul uses **brother** and **sister** to identify the people involved as believers of both genders. The people he refers to are **brother** and **sister** of the Corinthian believers, not of the **unbeliever**. Rather, **the brother or the sister** is married to the **unbeliever**. If your readers would misunderstand **the brother or the sister**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to believing husbands and wives. Alternate translation: “the believing husband or wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
853	1CO	7	15	q6k2	figs-activepassive	οὐ δεδούλωται ὁ ἀδελφὸς ἢ ἡ ἀδελφὴ	1		If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **not bound** rather than what does the “binding.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “the marriage” does not bind the **brother** or **sister**. Alternate translation: “the brother or the sister is free” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
854	1CO	7	15	z5nz	grammar-connect-words-phrases	δὲ	2		Here, **but** introduces how Paul wants the Corinthians to act in general. Whether their spouse leaves or not, they should act in **peace**. If your readers would misunderstand **but**, you could express the idea by using a word or phrase that introduces a general principle. If you use the following alternate translation, you may need to add period before it. Alternate translation: “In every case,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
855	1CO	7	15	tli3	figs-abstractnouns	εἰρήνῃ	1		If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **peace**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “peaceful” or an adverb such as “peaceably.” Alternate translation: “act peaceably” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
856	1CO	7	16	l559	figs-yousingular	οἶδας…τὸν ἄνδρα σώσεις…οἶδας…τὴν γυναῖκα σώσεις	1	do you know, woman … you will save your husband … do you know, man … you will save your wife	Here Paul addresses specific individuals within the Corinthian church. Because of this, **you** in this verse is always singular. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
857	1CO	7	16	h5td	figs-rquestion	τί…οἶδας, γύναι, εἰ τὸν ἄνδρα σώσεις? ἢ τί οἶδας, ἄνερ, εἰ τὴν γυναῖκα σώσεις?	1	how do you know, woman, whether you will save your husband?	Paul does not ask these questions because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks them to involve the Corinthians in what he is arguing. The questions assume that the answer is “we do not know for sure.” Paul could be using these questions to show the Corinthians that: (1) they should have little confidence about unbelieving spouses becoming Christians. The questions thus support how Paul allows divorces initiated by an unbelieving spouse in [6:21](../07/15.md). Alternate translation: “it is unlikely, woman, that you will save the husband. And it is unlikely, man, that you will save the wife.” (2) show the Corinthians that they should have much confidence about unbelieving spouses becoming Christians. The questions thus support how Paul says that the unbelieving spouse is “holy” in [7:14](../07/14.md). Alternate translation: “it is likely, woman, that you will save the husband. And it is likely, man, that you will save the wife.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
858	1CO	7	16	nd1k	figs-infostructure	τί γὰρ οἶδας, γύναι, εἰ…τί οἶδας, ἄνερ, εἰ	1	how do you know, man, whether you will save your wife?	Here, **woman** and **man** are direct addresses to people in the audience. If your language would put these words someone else in the sentence, you could move them to where they sound natural. Alternate translation: “For woman, how do you know whether… man, how do you know whether” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
859	1CO	7	16	dbz6		τί…οἶδας, γύναι, εἰ τὸν ἄνδρα σώσεις? ἢ τί οἶδας, ἄνερ, εἰ τὴν γυναῖκα σώσεις?	1	how do you know, man, whether you will save your wife?	Here Paul directly addresses a **woman** and a **man** in the audience. The Corinthians would have understood him to mean a **woman** or **man** in their group who was married to an unbelieving spouse. If your readers would misunderstand **woman** or **man**, you express the direct address in a different way. Alternate translation: “how does any woman know whether she will save the husband? Or how does any man know whether he will save the wife?”
860	1CO	7	16	b5zw	figs-genericnoun	γύναι…τὸν ἄνδρα…ἄνερ…τὴν γυναῖκα	1	how do you know, man, whether you will save your wife?	Here Paul refers to **woman**, **husband**, **man**, and **wife** in the singular, but he is speaking generically of any person who fits into these categories. If your language does not use the singular form to refer to people in general, you could use a form that does refer generically to people in your language. Alternate translation: “each of you women … your husband … each of you men … your wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
861	1CO	7	16	jt3c	figs-metonymy	σώσεις	-1	how do you know, man, whether you will save your wife?	Here Paul speaks of husbands or wives leading their spouses to faith in Jesus as “saving” them. By this, Paul means that the **woman** or **man** is the means by which God will **save** the **husband** or **wife**. If your readers would misunderstand **you will save**, you could use a word or phrase that refers to leading someone towards “salvation,” that is, helping them to believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “God will use you to save … God will use you to save” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
862	1CO	7	17	ivee	grammar-connect-words-phrases	εἰ μὴ	1	each one	Here, **However** acknowledges the exception about “walking” **as the Lord has assigned to each one** that he just included: if an unbelieving spouse wishes to divorce a believing spouse, that is permissible. Paul acknowledges this exception but wishes to emphasize the main point: the believers should remain in the state they are in. If **However** would not have the meaning of acknowledging an exception to a claim, you could use a word or phrase that does do so. Alternate translation: “In every other case” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-words-phrases]])
863	1CO	7	17	l5lu	figs-infostructure	ἑκάστῳ ὡς ἐμέρισεν ὁ Κύριος, ἕκαστον ὡς κέκληκεν ὁ Θεός, οὕτως περιπατείτω	1	each one	If your language would state the command to **walk** before explaining how to **walk**, you could rearrange these clauses so that they read more naturally. Alternate translation: “let each one walk as the Lord has assigned to each one, as God has called each one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
864	1CO	7	17	ya76	figs-ellipsis	ὡς ἐμέρισεν ὁ Κύριος	1	each one	Here Paul omits some words that might be needed in your language to make a complete sentence. If necessary, you could include what it is that **the Lord has assigned** by using a word such as “task” or “position.” Alternate translation: “as the Lord has assigned a position” or “as the Lord has assigned a task” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
865	1CO	7	17	hl43	figs-metaphor	περιπατείτω	1	each one	Paul speaks of behavior in life as if it were “walking.” If **let him walk** would not be understood as a description of a person’s way of life in your language, you could express the idea non-figuratively or with a comparable metaphor. Alternate translation: “let him live his life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
866	1CO	7	17	c7b9	figs-imperative	περιπατείτω	1	each one	Here Paul uses a third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use one here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the idea using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “he must walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
867	1CO	7	17	o6v2	figs-gendernotations	περιπατείτω	1	each one	Here, **he** is written in masculine form, but it refers to anyone, no matter what their gender might be. If your readers would misunderstand **he**, you could express the idea by using a word that does not have gender or you could use both genders. Alternate translation: “let him or her walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
868	1CO	7	17	iid2		καὶ οὕτως ἐν ταῖς ἐκκλησίαις πάσαις διατάσσομαι	1	I direct in this way in all the churches	Alternate translation: “This is what I require from all the churches”
869	1CO	7	18	zo3j	figs-gendernotations	μὴ ἐπισπάσθω…μὴ περιτεμνέσθω	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	Here Paul is speaking of male circumcision only. Therefore, the masculine words in this verse should be retained in translation if possible. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
870	1CO	7	18	unc4	figs-rquestion	περιτετμημένος τις ἐκλήθη? μὴ ἐπισπάσθω	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to identify people who fit into the situation he describes. If someone answered “yes” to this question, then the following command applies to them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could use a different way to identify to whom the command applies. Alternate translation: “If anyone was called, having been circumcised, let him not be uncircumcised.” or “Some of you were called, having been circumcised. If that is you, do not be uncircumcised.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
871	1CO	7	18	gpav	figs-activepassive	τις ἐκλήθη…κέκληταί τις	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **called** rather than the person doing the “calling.” If you must state who does the action, Paul implies that “God” does it. Alternate translation: “Did God call anyone … Did God call anyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
872	1CO	7	18	xt7p	figs-activepassive	περιτετμημένος	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on those who are **circumcised** rather than the person doing the “circumcising.” If you must state who does the action, you could use an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “someone having circumcised them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
873	1CO	7	18	tkn4	translate-unknown	μὴ ἐπισπάσθω	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	To **be uncircumcised** refers to a physical procedure by which one could make one’s penis appear to have a foreskin, even though one had been circumcised. If your language has a word for this procedure, you could use it here. If your language does not have such a word, you could use a phrase that identifies this procedure. Alternate translation: “Let him not hide his circumcision” or “Let him not undo his circumcision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
874	1CO	7	18	cejz	figs-imperative	μὴ ἐπισπάσθω…μὴ περιτεμνέσθω	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	In this verse, Paul uses two third-person imperative. If you have third-person imperatives in your language, you could use them here. If you do not have third-person imperatives, you could express the ideas using a word such as “should” or “must.” Alternate translation: “He must not be uncircumcised … he must not be circumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
875	1CO	7	18	uwuw	figs-activepassive	μὴ ἐπισπάσθω…μὴ περιτεμνέσθω	1	Was anyone called when he was circumcised?	If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Paul uses the passive form here to focus on the person who is **uncircumcised** or **circumcised** rather than the person doing the “uncircumcising” or “circumcising.” If you must state who does the action, you could use an indefinite or vague subject. Alternate translation: “Let someone not uncircumcise him … Let someone not circumcise him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
876	1CO	7	18	fqv6	figs-rquestion	ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ κέκληταί τις? μὴ περιτεμνέσθω	1	Was anyone called in uncircumcision?	Paul does not ask this question because he is looking for information. Rather, he asks it to identify people who fit into the situation he describes. If someone answered “yes” to this question, then the following command applies to them. If your readers would misunderstand this question, you could use a different way to identify to whom the command applies. Alternate translation: “If anyone was called in uncircumcision, let him not be circumcised.” or “Some of you were called in uncircumcision. If that is you, do not be circumcised.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
877	1CO	7	18	a8g3	figs-abstractnouns	ἐν ἀκροβυστίᾳ	1	Was anyone called in uncircumcision?	If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind **uncircumcision**, you could express the idea by using an adjective such as “uncircumcised.” Alternate translation: “while uncircumcised” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
878	1CO	7	19	oajz	figs-hyperbole	ἡ περιτομὴ οὐδέν ἐστιν, καὶ ἡ ἀκροβυστία οὐδέν ἐστιν	1	Was anyone called in uncircumcision?	Here Paul says that both **Circumcision** and **uncircumcision** are **nothing**. He does not mean that **Circumcision** and **uncircumcision** do not exist. Rather, the Corinthians would have understood him to mean that **Circumcision** and **uncircumcision** do not have value or importance. If your readers would misunderstand **nothing**, you could use a comparable figure of speech or express the idea non-figuratively. Alternate translation: “Circumcision has no value, and uncircumcision has no value” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])

The file is too large to be shown. View Raw